Anda di halaman 1dari 379

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Seasonal of 24 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : First touch on ball on the ground

Session 13 : No printed

Session 2 : First touch on ball on the ground

Session 14 : No printed

Session 3 : First touch on ball on the ground

Session 15 : No printed

Session 4 : First touch on air ball

Session 16 : No printed

Session 5 : First touch on air ball

Session 17 : No printed

Session 6 : First touch on air ball

Session 18 : No printed

Session 7 : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Session 19 : No printed

Session 8 : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Session 20 : No printed

Session 9 : No printed

Session 21 : No printed

Session 10 : No printed

Session 22 : No printed

Session 11 : No printed

Session 23 : No printed

Session 12 : No printed

Session 24 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1026 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3002 / 90 degree turn


3006 / 90 degrees control
3005 / 90 degrees control

10 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5004 / Controls

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1026
The touch
The touch

Juggling relay:

Controlling an air ball

Groups of 3 players with one ball per


group.
Team race relay.
A juggles through the slalom and passes
to B; B juggles through the slalom in the
other way and passes to C; etc.
If the ball falls, the player restarts at the
spot where the ball has fallen.

Improving the touch


Balance
Coordination

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones.


Variations:
- restarting from the beginning if the ball
falls
- going around each cone

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3002
90 degree turn
90 degree turn

First touch + passing + moving :

First touch to change direction away from


pressure

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


Triangle, controlling + passing + moving.
The player takes the place of the
teammate he just passed the ball to.
Distance between players : 7-8 yards

First touch + pass


Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.

Coaching points :

First touch options : inside right foot


toward the right ; inside right foot toward
the left ; outside right foot ; etc. Same with
left foot.

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball
- first touch in the direction of the player
we want to pass the ball to

10 min

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3006
90 degrees control
90 degrees control

Give and go :

First touch to change direction and to go


away from the opponent

Groups of 4 players with one ball per


group.
A passes to B ; B passes back to A ; A
passes to C and runs to C ; C passes to
B, etc. (see diagram)
Always controlling the ball before a pass.

Control + pass
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.

15 min

Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3005
90 degrees control
90 degrees control

20 min

Technical course :

First touch to change direction and to go


away from the opponent

Two goals 25 yards away from each


other. Controlling, passing and shooting
sequences.
Control + pass
A passes to B who controls and passes to
C ; C controls and passes to D ; D
Control + shot
controls and shoots at the goal. After his
pass, the player moves to the next
Focusing on the quality of the first touch,
position :
the passes and the shots.
A goes in B ; B in C ; C in D ; D in A' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on the
Different kind of control to make : inside
number of players to have a minimum of
right foot toward the right ; inside right foot timeout.
toward the left ; outside right foot ; etc.
Same with left foot.
Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones.

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

Match 5004
Controls
Controls

8 vs 8 game :

Passing

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good first touch.
Quality of the sequences first touch +
pass and first touch + shot.

Shooting

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1022 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2001 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3021 / 180 degrees control


3022 / 180 degrees control
3025 / 180 degrees control

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5004 / Controls

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1022
The touch
The touch

Juggling test:

Juggling

Balance

2 players: one player juggles and the


other one counts.
3 attempts per player with each juggling
variation (keep the highest score).
Keeping track of the results.

Coordination

Variations:

Equipment: balls.

- Right foot
- Left foot
- Header
- Free

Individual control of the ball

15 min

- etc.

Physical 2001
Speed
Speed

Speed tests:

running speed

Speed: 40 meters timed.


Going back and forth speed: 4x10m
timed.
One attempt on each course.
Keeping track of times to compare them
to previous tests.

Equipment: cones, decameter.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3021
180 degrees control
180 degrees control

Controlling + passing :

First touch to play forward (protecting the


ball)

A passes to B ; B makes a 180 degrees


control and passes to C ; C makes a 180
degrees control and dribbles going around
the cone then passes to B ; etc.

Control + pass
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.
Different kind of control to make : inside
right foot and dribbling inside right foot ;
outside right foot and dribbling outside
right foot. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions :
- distance between players : 7-8 yards
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- application on each pass to allow
teammate to work on their first touch
correctly
Changing positions of players (A in B, B in
C, C in A, etc.).

Technical 3022
180 degrees control
180 degrees control

Controlling + passing :

First touch to play forward (protecting the


ball)

Groups of 4 players with one ball per


group (see diagram).
B asks for the ball in front of C ; A passes
to B ; B makes a 180 degrees control
protecting his ball and passes to D ; (then
C asks for the ball in front of B ; D passes
to C ; etc.).
One after one, B and C play the role of
passive defender.
Alternating positions of players (D and A
change with B and C).

Control + pass
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.
Different kind of control to make : inside
right foot and dribbling inside right foot ;
outside right foot and dribbling outside
right foot. Same with left foot.

15 min

Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- application on each pass to allow
teammate to work on his first touch
correctly

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3025
180 degrees control
180 degrees control

20 min

Technical course :

First touch to play forward (protecting or


not the ball)

Two goals are placed 25 yards away from


each other. Controlling, passing and
shooting sequences.
Control + pass
A passes to B who controls and passes to
C ; C controls and shoots at the goal ;
Control + shot
after a pass, the player moves to the next
position : A goes to B ; B to C ; C to A' ;
Focusing on the quality of the first touch,
etc.
passes and shots.
At the same time, A' passes to B' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on number
Different kind of control to make : stopping of players to have a minimum of time out.
inside right foot and dribbling inside left
foot ; inside right foot behind planted leg
Instructions :
and dribbling inside right foot ; inside right
foot and dribbling inside right foot ;
- being on one's toes
outside right foot and dribbling outside
- attacking the ball
right foot ; etc. Same with left foot.
- making good passes (accuracy and
good weigh)
Equipment : balls, cones.

Match 5004
Controls
Controls

8 vs 8 game :

Passing

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good first touch.
Quality of the sequences first touch +
pass and first touch + shot.

Shooting

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1035 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2016 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3030 / Controlling in a direction while moving


3028 / Controlling in a direction while moving
3031 / Controlling in a direction while moving

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5004 / Controls

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1035
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age of group)
placed inside the goaline (players can
play behind the goals). Players can score
in both of the goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2016
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercises:

Agility

Bars (or cones) are placed on the field


(about 20 inches between cones or bars).

10 min

Frequency
Race instructions:
Equipment: cones or bars.
- 2 steps (1 right foot and 1 left foot)
between cones
- going forward 2 cones then stepping
back one cone; going forward 2 cones
then stepping back one cone; etc.
Variations:
First exercise: player faces the course
Second exercise: player moves laterally

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3030
Controlling in a direction while moving
Controlling in a direction while moving

15 min

Controlling while running + passing :

Controlling the ball while running

Making 2 lines of players (A and B). 5


yards space between gates. 2 yard gates.
Control + pass
A makes a lead pass to B just before the
first cone ; B controls inside right foot and
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
makes a lead pass to A through the gate ;
and the passes : when controlling, the ball A controls inside left foot and makes a
has to stay in one's feet.
lead pass to B through the next gate ; etc.
After each round, A and B switch sides to
Equipment : balls, cones.
work on right and left foot control.
Instructions :
- controlling the ball with the inside
- making good passes (accuracy and
good weigh)
- 2 yard gates

Technical 3028
Controlling in a direction while moving
Controlling in a direction while moving

15 min

Controlling while running :

Controlling the ball while running

4 players with 2 per station.


A makes a lead pass to B ; B runs to the
Control + pass
ball, controls and dribbles to C (at the
same time, C made a lead pass to D who
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
ran to the ball, controlled and dribbled to
and the passes : when controlling, the ball A).
has to stay in one's feet.
After their passes, A and C go
respectively to B and D. B makes a lead
Equipment : balls, cones.
pass to C and D makes a lead pass to A ;
A and C control, etc.
Instructions :
- inside foot control
- changing direction of the play to use
right and left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3031
Controlling in a direction while moving
Controlling in a direction while moving

Controlling while running + shooting :

Controlling the ball while running

A makes a lead pass to B who controls


inside right foot then passes laterally to A
who controls inside left foot and shoots
left foot (see diagram).
Same other side to shoot right foot.

Control + pass
Control + shot

20 min

Focusing on the quality of the first touch


Instruction :
and the passes : when controlling, the ball
has to stay in one's feet.
- quick sequence control + shot
- making good passes (accuracy and
Equipment : balls, cones.
good weigh)

Match 5004
Controls
Controls

8 vs 8 game :

Passing

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good first touch.
Quality of the sequences first touch +
pass and first touch + shot.

Shooting

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1023 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2011 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3037 / Air ball controls


3041 / Air ball controls
3042 / Air ball controls

10 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1023
The touch
The touch

One touch pass and trapping:

Communication

Making 2 groups of players. Each of the


yellows has a ball and makes a circle
(about 15 yards diameter). Reds without
balls are inside the circle.
Reds jog and ask for the ball from yellow
players. They do the technical form as
instructed by the trainer.
Working on both feet. For air balls,
yellows throw the ball with their hands,
changing roles every 2 minutes.

One touch passing


First touch
Pass
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Technical forms:
- one touch pass (ball on the ground)
- one touch pass on air ball (volleying,
heading)
- chest trap and pass with the foot
- etc.

Physical 2011
Speed
Speed

Sprint and shot:

running speed

2 goals are 26 yards away from each


other. Have 2 teams.
A passes the ball through a small goal (2
yards) then sprints to get it back and
shoot in the opposite goal.
B does the same at the other side.
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the goal first. After the shot, A goes
behind blues and B behind reds.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- shooting right foot
- shooting left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3037
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Controlling in a direction :

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.

One ball per player.


The player juggles the ball. After 4
juggling touches, he puts the ball on the
ground using one of the different air ball
controls. Then he juggles again and after
few touches, he controls the ball ; etc.

Having the ball on the ground after the


first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.

10 min

Instruction :
- control + 3 or 4 yards dribbling

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3041
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

20 min

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

The player juggles the ball toward the


goal and controls it just before the cone
Focusing on the first touch, a quick control and shoots.
of the ball in the chosen direction, and on
the control + shot sequence.
Variations :
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.

Variation 1 : control + shot right foot (see


diagram)
Variation 2 : control + shot left foot
Instructions :
- quick sequence control + shot
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls

Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3042
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

20 min

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

The player juggles parall to the goal line,


controls in the opposite direction and
Focusing on the first touch, a quick control shoots at the goal pivoting.
of the ball in the chosen direction, and on
the control + shot sequence.
Variations :
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Variation 1 : control and shot right foot


(see diagram)
Variation 2 : control and shot left foot
(players start from the other side)
Instructions :
- quick sequence control + shot
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1028 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2013 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3035 / Air ball controls


3038 / Air ball controls
3039 / Air ball controls

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1028
The touch
The touch

Juggling and shooting:

Controlling an air ball

One ball for 3 players. 3 slaloms are set in


front of a goal kept by a goalie (see
diagram).
Dividing players in 2 groups; a group in
front of each slalom.
First players of each line start at the same
time: They juggle through the slalom and
shoot at the goal.
Free juggling.

Improving the touch


Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Variations:
- volleying
- half-volleying
- putting the ball on the ground before
shooting

Physical 2013
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercise:

Speed agility

First exercise: two lines (lines or bars)


parallel, 20 inches from each other:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step outside the lines, and left foot step
and right foot step inside the lines (see
diagram)
Second exercise: using the outside field
line or bars:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step inside the field, and left foot step and
right foot step outside the field (see
diagram)

Frequence
Equipment: cones or bars.

10 min

Instructions:
- vivacity
- dynamism

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3035
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Chest control + pass :

Controlling + passing

Per group of 3 players. One ball per


group.
A throws the ball to B who controls the
ball with the chest toward C and passes to
C ; C throws the ball to A who controls
with the chest toward B and passes to B ;
etc.

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Variation :
- changing direction

Technical 3038
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

A throws the ball to B ; B controls toward


the goal and shoots.

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left and
shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right
and shot left foot
Instructions :
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls
- quick sequence control + shot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3039
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

A throws the ball to B ; B, the goal at his


back, controls toward the goal and shoots.

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : control toward the goal + shot
right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : control toward the goal + shot
left foot
Instructions :
- 2 touches if possible : one to control the
ball and one to shoot
- quick sequence control + shot
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3046 / Air ball trapping


3047 / Air ball trapping
3040 / Air ball controls

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3046
Air ball trapping
Air ball trapping

Long pass + trapping :

Trapping + long passing

Groups of 2 players. 1 ball per group.


Face to face : A makes a long pass to B ;
B traps the ball with the foot, thigh, chest
or head then passes long to A ; etc.

Focusing on controlling air ball : air ball


trap.
Different kind of trapping to make :
trapping instep right foot ; trapping inside
right foot ; trapping with the thigh ;
trapping with the chest ; trapping with the
head. Same traps left foot.

15 min

Instructions :
- long passes with the instep
- adapting distance between A and B
- application when trapping the ball

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3047
Air ball trapping
Air ball trapping

Long pass + trapping + shot :

Trapping + long passing


Trapping + shooting

A makes a long pass to B ; B traps the


ball ; B passes long to A ; A traps the ball
and shoots at the goal.

Long pass and cross

Instructions :

Focusing on controlling air ball : air ball


trap.

- long passes with the instep


- working on different kinds of trapping
- choosing the kind of trapping the most
adapted to the situation
- after having trapped the ball, A dribbles
and shoots quickly

Different kind of trapping to make :


trapping instep right foot ; trapping inside
right foot ; trapping with the thigh ;
trapping with the chest ; trapping with the
head. Same traps left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
Variation 1 : B crosses from the right (see
diagram)
Variation 2 : B crosses from the left

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3040
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Long pass + control + shot :

Controlling + long pass

A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and


crosses to A ; A controls toward the goal
and shoots.

Controlling + shooting
Focusing on the first touch : a quick
control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : B crosses from the right and
A shoots left foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : B crosses from the left and A
shoots right foot
Instructions :
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls
- good long passes (weigh and accuracy)

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1032 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2002 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3065 / 1 vs 1 moves
3071 / 1 vs 1 moves
3069 / 1 vs 1 moves

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5011 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1032
Small sided games
Small sided games

3 vs 3 game:

- few players

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group) with no keeper.
3 vs 3 game; 3 minutes per game; rotate
opponent.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2002
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball :

Reaction speed

Races per 2 players. 5 yards space


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint,
going around the cones of the slalom: the
first player arriving to the ball shoots.
1 point for the team per shot and one
bonus point per goal scored.
One duel at a time (no relay).

Running speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3065
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Cuts :

Cuts

Maximum 4 players per station. One ball


per player.
The player dribbles the ball and makes
the cut in front of each yellow cone (cone
= opponent).
Setting several courses.

Focusing on the notion of change of


direction.
The cut (the move + the acceleration)
allows the player to change direction
quickly.
Different cuts to make : inside right foot ;
outside right foot ; inside behind planted
leg ; double-touch ; etc. Same left foot.

15 min

Instructions :
- application on each cut
- the cut must a sharp change of direction

Equipment : balls, cones.

Technical 3071
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Cuts course :

Cuts

The player dribbles through the course as


fast as he can (see diagram).
Timing : players have several tries to
break their record.
Free dribbling.

Focusing on the notion of change of


direction.
The cut (the move + the acceleration)
allows the player to change of direction
quickly.
Double-touch : double-touch inside right
foot left foot ; double-touch inside outside
right foot.

15 min

Comment :
No specific instructions. The course is set
so that players have to make a
succession of double-touches to go fast.

Equipment : balls, cones, timer.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3069
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Course with cuts and shots :

Cuts

Players advance on the course (see


diagram).
A dribbles the ball through the slalom and
shoots at the goal. After the shot he goes
to B. B does the same in the other
direction and goes to A after his shot.
The trainer announces the kind of cut to
make through the cones.
Non-stop course.

Focusing on the notion of change of


direction.
The cut (the move + the acceleration)
allows the player to change of direction
quickly.
Double-touch : double-touch inside right
foot left foot ; double-touch inside outside
right foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Cuts to make :
double-touch inside right foot - inside left
foot
double-touch inside right foot - outside
right foot
double-touch inside left foot - inside right
foot
double-touch inside left foot - outside left
foot

Match 5011
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Beating an opponent with "faking" and


"pretending". The ball carrier pretends he
goes in one direction but goes in another
one.

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the defender.
Playing 1 vs 1 in the attacking third
(finishing zone).

20 min

- importance of the positioning, the speed


and angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed ;
Keeping the defender off-guard
- protecting the ball (using shoulders,
body, feet, ...)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1001 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2015 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3077 / 1 vs 1 moves
3080 / 1 vs 1 moves

15 min
20 min

Tactical :

4024 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

15 min

Match :

5011 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1001
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

Dribbling and Passing:

Dribbling the ball

Passing

Split the players into groups of 6 or more.


Players make a circle approximately 12
yards in diameter. Two players have a
ball.
Players who have a ball dribble it for a few
yards, pass to a teammate without a ball,
and then take their place.

Equipment: balls, cones.

Variations:

Looking around
First touch

15 min

- asking players to make a fake before


passing
- 2 touches (control + pass)
- adding a third ball (or more) to
encourage players to look up.

Physical 2015
Coordination
Coordination

Agility and vivacity:

Agility

Have groups of 2 players.


Each player has a pennie placed on the
back (half in the short).
Duel: trying to take opponent's pennie
while keeping one's own pennie. One
point scored each time a player takes the
pinnie.
1 minute games. Changing opponent
regularly.

Vivacity
Fake
Equipment: pennies (1 color).

10 min

Variation:
- no pennie: to score, touching one of the
opponent's feet

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3077
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Fakes:

Fakes

Two teams play against each other like on


the diagram. Duel opposing one player of
each team.
A has the ball in front of his feet. To score,
A has to dribble through to both goals. B
tries to prevent A from scoring.
The play is on as soon as a touches the
ball.

Focusing on the notions of making


believe, pretending.
Pretending to go in a direction and going
in other one.

15 min

Unbalancing one's opponent.


Instruction:
Fakes to make: body fakes; shot fake;
scissors; step-over; double scissors; etc.
Using right and left foot.
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- A multiplies the fakes without touches


the ball to unbalance B and goes to score
a goal in the opposite goal.
Variations:
- the defenders scores if he takes the ball
back from the attacker
- the defender scores if he tags the
attacker

Technical 3080
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Fake and 1 vs 1 and shot:

Fakes

The attacker tries to score after having


eliminated the defender who's in the 6x6
square yard.

Fake and shot


Focusing on the notions of making
believe, pretending.Keeping the defender
off-guard.
Pretending to go in a direction and going
in other one. Looking for effectiveness in
the shots.
Fakes to make: body fakes; shot fake;
scissors; step-over; double scissors; etc.
Using right and left foot.
Equipment: balls, cones.

20 min

Variations:
- the defender just does opposite without
trying to intercept the ball (passive
defender)
- the defender tries to get the ball back
(active defender)
Instructions:
- using different fakes to go past the
opponent
- trying to score just after having beaten
an opponent

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4024
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

1 vs 1 duel:

Beating an opponent is associated with


the notions of "faking" and "pretending".
The ball carrier pretends a goes in a
direction but goes in another one.

15x15 square yard field with 2 small goals


(2 yards).
Exercise is set up like on the diagram.
The attacker (yellow) dribbles toward the
defender (red) and tries to go past them to
score on one of two goals.
To score, A has to dribble the ball through
one of both goals defended by B.
Changing roles every 4 minutes. Do
several rounds.

- Appreciating the position, the speed and


angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed;
Keeping the defender off-guard

Instructions:

- protecting the ball (using shoulders,


body, feet,)

- 1 point per goal scored


- using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the opponent

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

Match 5011
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Beating an opponent with "faking" and


"pretending". The ball carrier pretends he
goes in one direction but goes in another
one.

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the defender.
Playing 1 vs 1 in the attacking third
(finishing zone).

20 min

- importance of the positioning, the speed


and angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed ;
Keeping the defender off-guard
- protecting the ball (using shoulders,
body, feet, ...)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Seasonal of 24 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 13 : Creating space

Session 2 : No printed

Session 14 : One touch play

Session 3 : No printed

Session 15 : One touch play

Session 4 : No printed

Session 16 : One touch play

Session 5 : No printed

Session 17 : No printed

Session 6 : No printed

Session 18 : No printed

Session 7 : No printed

Session 19 : No printed

Session 8 : No printed

Session 20 : No printed

Session 9 : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Session 21 : No printed

Session 10 : Creating space

Session 22 : No printed

Session 11 : Creating space

Session 23 : No printed

Session 12 : Creating space

Session 24 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1002 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2018 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4027 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent


4036 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
4040 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5011 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1002
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

Controlling + Passing:

Controlling

All the players are inside an area of 20x25


yards. One ball for 2 players.
Players move and pass the ball to each
other. Groups consist of 2 players.
After a few minutes, set the following rule:
everybody plays together (no more
groups); it's forbidden to pass the ball to
the player who just passed you the ball.

Passing facing the play


Asking for the ball
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- after a pass, get wide and face the play
- ask for a pass to the feet
- look around

Physical 2018
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Miror game :

Speed agility

Setting several fields composed of two


7x7 yard square. 2 players per field.
The 2 players face each other each of
them being in the middle of his square.
A leads the game : A runs and touches a
cone with his hand. B plays the reflection
of A.
Going slowly at the beginning then fast
when the game is well understood.
Changing role every 30 seconds.

Vivacity
Reaction speed
Coordination
Equipment : cones.

10 min

Instructions :
- A must always go to touch a cone
- A and B are always facing each other
Variation :
- B tries to imitate A but when A goes
forward B has to go backward and when
A goes backward B has to go forward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4027
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

1 vs 1 duel:

To beat an opponent is to fake to go in a


direction and then going into a different
direction.
- reading the speed and angle of the run
of the opponent

Several 12x6 yard fields with 2 small


goals (2 yards).
1 vs 1 duel on each field.
1 min. 30 sec. games.
Moving up/Moving down game: the winner
moves up, the loser moves down.

- timing of the 1vs1 move

Moving up/moving down game rules:

- change of speed ; keeping the defender


off-guard/off-balance

- winners move up (toward field 1) and


losers move down (toward field 4)

15 min

- shielding the ball (using shoulders, body,


feet,)
Equipment: balls, cones.

Tactical 4036
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

2 vs 2 games:

To beat an opponent is to fake to go in a


direction and then going into a different
direction.

20x20 yds fields with small goals (2 yards)


(see diagram).
Have teams of 2 players and set up
several fields next to each other.
2 vs 2 games: Each team attacks and
defends 2 goals. To score, dribble the ball
through one of the opposition's goals. 3
minute games.
Moving up/moving down game: the winner
moves up, the loser moves down.

Advices and criteria of success:


- reading the speed and angle of the run
of the opponent
- timing of the 1vs1 move
- change of speed ; keeping the defender
off-guard/off-balance
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Moving up/moving down game rules:


- winners move up (toward field 1) and
losers move down (toward field 3)
Coaching points :
- forward passes are forbidden; only
backward and sideward passes allowed
- encouraging players to beat the direct
opponent in the 1 vs 1 situations (taking
risks)

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4040
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

3 vs 3 + Gks:

To beat an opponent is to fake to go in a


direction and then going into a different
direction.

3 teams of 3 players. 26x20 yard field with


goals.
3 vs 3 + Gks. One team is resting.
3 minutes per game.
Small sided game with goals close to
each other. Players are constantly in the
attacking third that means priority to
shooting and beating one's opponent.

- reading the speed and angle of the run


of the opponent
- timing of the 1vs1 move
- change of speed ; keeping the defender
off-guard/off-balance

15 min

Instructions:

- when there is a corner-kick, the keeper


- shielding the ball (using shoulders, body, of the team which has the corner-kick
feet,)
restarts the play with a throw (no
corner-kick)
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3
- when there is a goal-kick, the keeper
colors).
restarts the play with a throw (no
goal-kick)
- after a goal, the keeper restarts the play
with a throw (no kick-off)
- encouraging players to take risks:
shooting and trying to beat one's
opponent, playing 1 vs 1 situations

Match 5011
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Beating an opponent with "faking" and


"pretending". The ball carrier pretends he
goes in one direction but goes in another
one.

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the defender.
Playing 1 vs 1 in the attacking third
(finishing zone).

20 min

- importance of the positioning, the speed


and angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed ;
Keeping the defender off-guard
- protecting the ball (using shoulders,
body, feet, ...)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1029 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2004 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4002 / Getting open


4009 / Getting open
4010 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1029
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2004
Speed
Speed

Sprint duel:

reacting to a sonorous signal

Races per 2 players. 6 and 8-yard spaces


between lines 1, 2, and 3.
At the sonorous signal, both players
complete the following course
(determined by 3 lines) as fast as
possible:
sprinting from 1 to 2; running backward
from 2 to 1 then sprinting up to the line 3.
1 point for the team per duel won. A duel
at a time (no relay).

Running speed
Equipment: cones, pennies (2 colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4002
Getting open
Getting open

4 vs 2 keep-away:

Focusing on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group, a


15x15 yard field (with a diagonal) per
group.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against two defenders who try to get it
back.
Each defender has to stay in one's
triangle.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- Have teams of 2 players: both players of


the team that loses the ball become
defenders
- only the player who loses the ball
becomes defender

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- leading players in their moves if
necessary
- helping the ball carrier

Tactical 4009
Getting open
Getting open

5 vs 3 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

20x20 square yard field.


5 players (4 outside and 1 inside the field)
try to keep possession of the ball against
3 defenders (inside the field).
Changing roles regularly.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Variations:
- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder
- the midfielder is limited to 1 touch

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4010
Getting open
Getting open

6 vs 4 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

20x20 square yard field split in 4 squares.


6 players (4 outside and 2 inside the field)
try to keep possession of the ball against
4 defenders (inside the field).
Each defender has to stay in their square.
Have 5 teams of 2 players. Changing
roles of players every 2 minutes.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Variations:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder


- 1 point per 1-2 made between
midfielders

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1017 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2017 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4015 / Getting open


4016 / Getting open
4013 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1017
Tactical game
Tactical game

Keep-away 4 vs 2:

Passing

12x12 yard field. Four players are outside


of the field and try to keep possession of
the ball. Two defenders are inside the
field and try to intercept the ball.
The player who loses the ball becomes
defender.

Getting open
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- 2 touches maximum

Physical 2017
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Slalom races:

Speed agility

Groups of 5 or 6 players.

Vivacity

Two Variations (see diagram):

Speed

In red: players jog slowly one after one


leaving a 2 or 3 yards space between
them.
At the sonorous signal, the last player (E)
slaloms as fast as possible through
players and goes in front of A.
At the second signal, D does the same;
etc.
In blue: same principle as before but
players jog backward.
At the first sonorous signal, A slaloms
backward as fast as possible through
players and goes behind E; etc.

Coordination
Equipment: none.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4015
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking waves:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Teams of 3 players.
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper). The
Yellow team is waiting in the midfield.
When the play is over: the Blue team
goes to the midfield and waits; the Red
team defends; the Yellow team attacks.
If the defense gets the ball back; it has to
play it in the feet of one of the player of
the waiting team.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- asking the ball carrier to challenge the
defense
- asking other players to spread out to
create space

Tactical 4016
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. 35x20 yard field per


group (see diagram).
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper).
When the play is over: the Red team goes
back to defense (2 players and 1 keeper);
the Blue team attacks (3 players).

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Instruction:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- no counter-attack (if a defender gets the


ball back, he has to pass it back to his
keeper, giving time to the opponent to go
back in defense

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4013
Getting open
Getting open

Captains game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group,


30x20 yard field (with two 3x3 yard
outside areas) per group.
2 vs 2 game inside the field. To score,
pass the ball to the player (captain) of
one's team who's in the opposite outside
area.
When a team doesn't have the ball, the
captain; staying in his area plays with the
opposite team as a support.
4 vs 2 situation when in possession of the
ball.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

15 min

Instruction:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- changing captains regularly

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1030 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2006 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4006 / Getting open


4014 / Getting open
4019 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1030
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 yard field with 4 small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group). 2 goals on each side. Each team
attacks and defends 2 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2006
Speed
Speed

Elimination race:

Reaction speed

All the players are inside of a 6-yard


diameter circle.
Cones are 10 yards away around the
circle. There are 2 cones more than there
are players.
At the sonorous signal, players run up to a
cone and stop at the cone.
The 2 players who are not at a cone are
eliminated.
Start again taking away 2 more cones,
etc. The players remaining at the end win.
Do several rounds.

Running speed
Equipment: cones.

10 min

Variations:
- players jog in the circle
- players move on all four in the circle
- players crawl in the circle

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4006
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 4 game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Making 3 teams of 4 players. 25x25


square yard field.
4 vs 4 inside the field.
The team that has the ball tries to keep
possession of it with the help of the
outside players who always play with the
team who has the ball.
Changing middle teams every 3 minutes.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- outside players are limited to 2 touches


then 1 touch
- outside players cannot pass to each
other
- only passes between inside players
count as a point

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4014
Getting open
Getting open

Gates game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

35x25 yard field with five 2 yard gates


spread out all over the field.
4 vs 4 game. To score, a player has to
make a pass to a teammate through one
of the 5 gates.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Variations:
- players are not allowed to score twice in
a row on the same gate
- adding or taking off a gate

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4019
Getting open
Getting open

9 vs 3 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

35x25 yard field. 4 teams of 3 players.


Three teams try to keep possession of the
ball against one team that tries to get it
back. A
The team losing the ball becomes the
defending team.
diagram: Red, Green and Yellow play
together against White.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Instructions:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- looking for safety


- playing the ball where there are less
opponents
- looking for and creating space

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (4


colors).

15 min

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1016 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2012 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4003 / Getting open


4011 / Getting open
4020 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1016
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Getting open

50x30 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
6 vs 6 stop-ball (or more depending on
the number of players). To score, stop the
ball in the zone opposed to one's camp.
Players don't wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

Playing forward
Equipment: 1 ball, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- looking around

Physical 2012
Coordination
Coordination

Coordination course:

Speed agility

Starting every 3 seconds, players run


through the course (see diagram)
respecting the following instructions.

Equipment: cones, sticks.

10 min

Course instructions:
A: running through sticks without touching
them
B: 3xs hopping on right foot; 3xs hopping
on left foot
C: running backward
D: stepping on the right and on the left of
the bars (never between them)
E: between bars going forward
F: shuffle between bars going backward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4003
Getting open
Getting open

4 vs 2 keep-away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group, a


15x15 yard field per group.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against two defenders who try to get it
back.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- Have teams of 2 players: both players of


the team that loses the ball become
defenders
- only the player who loses the ball
becomes defender

Equipment: balls, cones.

Instructions:

- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

- leading players in their moves if


necessary
- helping the ball carrier

Tactical 4011
Getting open
Getting open

5 vs 3 keeps away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

20x20 square yard field with a 5x5 yard


area in the middle.
5 players (4 outside and 1 inside the
middle area) try to keep possession of the
ball against 3 defenders who try to get it
back (they can not step in the middle
area).
Changing roles regularly.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder


- the midfielder is limited to one touch

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4020
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 3 directed game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2-3


yards).
3 vs 3 game.
Asking players to constantly help and
offer solutions to the ball carrier.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- stopping the game to explain and
demonstrate if necessary

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1012 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2009 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3091 / One touch play


3092 / One touch play
3109 / One touch play

10 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1012
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

One touch pass:

Pass

Groups of 6 players (see diagram).


A passes the ball to B and runs back to
their line.
B passes to C with one touch and runs
back to their line; etc.
Passes must be precise and measured
out to give rhythm to the game.

One touch play


The touch
Equipment: balls.

15 min

Instructions:
- one touch play
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

Physical 2009
Speed
Speed

Reacting to the opponent come back:

Running speed

Groups of 2 players: B is 30 yards away


face to the goal. A is 7 yards behind him
with ball.
A passes the ball through B's legs and
tries to prevent B from scoring.
When B sees the ball go through his/her
legs they sprint to get it back and try to
score reacting to A's come back.
Be a then B alternatively.

Reaction speed
Gestural speed
Equipment: balls.

10 min

Comment:
All the players work on the same goal to
allow players to totally recover after each
run.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3091
One touch play
One touch play

One touch give-and-go :

One touch pass


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


One touch give-and-go : players are
limited to one touch.
The player passes the ball and runs
behind the last player of the opposite line.

- winning time

Instructions :

- beating the opponent

- keeping the ball on the ground


- using right and left foot

10 min

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

Technical 3092
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 5 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who makes a lead pass to
A ; A passes to C who makes a lead pass
to A ; A passes to D and runs behind D.
D does the same course like A in the
other direction.
Changing position regularly.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- no control (one touch pass)


- being on one's toes when receiving the
ball
- attacking the ball

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 min

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3109
One touch play
One touch play

One touch shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B ; B makes a lead pass to A


; A passes to C who makes a lead pass to
A ; A shoots at the goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the shots
paying attention at the position of the
body.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- players are limited to one touch
- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot
- changing positions regularly

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1014 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2019 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3100 / One touch play


3101 / One touch play
3112 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1014
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The 1-2:

1-2

Players evolve in a 30x20 yard field. Half


of the players have a ball.
Ball carriers play 1-2 with players without
a ball.
A passes to B and asks for the ball,
sprinting; B makes a lead pass with one
touch.
If, after his pass, A doesn't ask for the
ball, B controls it and becomes a ball
carrier.

Asking for the ball


One touch
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- accurate and well directed passes
- players without ball jog and ask for the
ball
- composure in one touch passes back

Physical 2019
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Running techniques + sprint :

Running techniques

Setting 8 bars 20 inches from each other.


Players run through the course 2 by 2
following the trainer's instructions : each
pass is followed by a 10 yard sprint.

Jumps

10 min

Running speed
Instructions for the different round :
Equipment : bars, cones.
- one step between bars : very quick
- 2 steps (RF + LF) between bars : very
quick
- standing jumps between bars
- standing jumps with high knee changing
foot each step
- lateral run : 2 quick step between bars
- hopping right foot
- hopping left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3100
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A in
one touch ; A passes to C ; C passes to B
who just turned around ; B passes back to
C ; C passes to A ; et.
All passes are made with one touch. B
turns around and let the ball go past him
after each of his pass.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

15 min

- beating the opponent


Instructions :
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch (no


control)
- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes

Technical 3101
One touch play
One touch play

/4 one touch passing exercise :

One touch pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A with
one touch ; A passes diagonally to C ; C
passes to D who passes back to C ; C
passes diagonally to B ; etc. (see
diagram)
After his pass B runs in A and A in B ;
after his pass D runs in C and C in D.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

15 min

- beating the opponent


Instructions :
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls, cones.

- one touch passing (no control)


- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3112
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing and shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B who passes back to A ; A


makes a soft in-depth pass to B ; B
passes laterally to C who shoots at the
goal.
Players are limited to one touch.
Changing positions regularly.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

20 min

Variations :
Equipment : balls, cones.
Variation 1 : pass from A to C comes from
the right + shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : pass from A to C comes from
the left + shot left foot

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1008 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2003 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3090 / One touch play


3097 / One touch play
3108 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1008
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The 1-2:

1-2

4 vs 4: two teams of 4 players play


against each other on a 20x20 square
yard field.
Keeping possession of the ball. Trying to
play 1-2 with their teammates. One point
scored per 1-2 correctly made.

Passing and moving


Asking for the ball

15 min

Asking for a lead pass


Instructions:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- passing and asking for the ball


- passing and accelerating
- concentration and application in
one-touch passes

Physical 2003
Speed
Speed

Sprinting and shooting:

running speed

2 goals face to face (26 yards) with


keepers.
A passes the ball to B and B passes the
ball to A.
After their pass, A and B sprint to receive
the ball from their teammate and shoot at
the goal (First time shot).
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the net first. After the shot, A goes to B
and B goes to A.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- passing in front of oneself and sprinting
diagonally (diagram)
- passing diagonally and sprinting straight
ahead

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3090
One touch play
One touch play

4 vs 1 keepaway (no control) :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 5 players with one ball per


group. 10x10 yard field.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against one defender.
The player who loses the ball becomes
the defender.
Players are limited to one touch.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

15 min

Equipment : balls, cones.

Technical 3097
One touch play
One touch play

5 vs 2 keepaway (no control) :

One touch pass

- accelerating the play

Groups of 7 players with one ball per


group. 10x10 yards squares. 5 players (4
outside + 1 inside the field) try to keep
possession of the ball against 2
defenders.
Each defender has to stay in his square.
A is allowed to play in both squares.
Players are limited to one touch (no
control play).
One point scored each time the midfielder
touches the ball without losing it.

Equipment : balls, cones.

Instructions :

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

15 min

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3108
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passes and shots course :

One touch pass

A passes to B then runs in front of the


goal. B passes to A who makes a lead
pass to B. B shoots at the goal.
Same for C and D on the other goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

Instructions :

Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch


- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot

20 min

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Seasonal of 24 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 13 : No printed

Session 2 : No printed

Session 14 : No printed

Session 3 : No printed

Session 15 : No printed

Session 4 : No printed

Session 16 : No printed

Session 5 : No printed

Session 17 : 2vs1 attacking

Session 6 : No printed

Session 18 : 2vs1 attacking

Session 7 : No printed

Session 19 : 2vs1 attacking

Session 8 : No printed

Session 20 : Direction of play

Session 9 : No printed

Session 21 : Direction of play

Session 10 : No printed

Session 22 : Direction of play

Session 11 : No printed

Session 23 : Heading technique

Session 12 : No printed

Session 24 : Volleying

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1015 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2020 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3132 / Long passing


3139 / Long passing and crossing
3133 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1015
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Keeping possession of the ball

60x40 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
Two teams play against each other (6v6
or more) depending on the number of
players. Keepers are in the zone opposed
to their camp.
To score, the keeper has to catch an air
pass without releasing it.

Playing forward
Keeper throw
Long air pass

15 min

Equipment: 1 ball, pennies (2 colors).


Instructions:
- free play
- after a goal and when there is a goal
kick, the keeper throws the ball for the
other team
- no corner kick (throw from the keeper to
the opposite team)

Physical 2020
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Relay race :

Running speed

Making 2 teams. Races.


The player, holding a ball in his hands,
runs through the course as fast as
possible following the instructions then
gives the ball to the next player. This
player does the same. And on and on until
every player has done it.
Doing several rounds.

Speed agility
Equipment : bars, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations :
- shuffle between bars then standing
jumps over each cone + shuffle between
bars then sprint up to the teammate
- same running backward then sprint up to
the teammate

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3132
Long passing
Long passing

Long pass :

Straight long pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : A makes a long pass to B ;
B controls the ball then makes a long
pass to A ; etc.

Long pass in the air


Focusing on the form of the long passes
and quality of the controls.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- working on long passes right and left
foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight long pass and high long
pass)
- adapting distance between A and B
- free first touch

Technical 3139
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

15 min

Long passing + one touch passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B who passes
Long pass in the air
back to C in one touch ; C passes to B
who makes a long pass to D ; D passes
One touch volley pass
back to A ; A passes to D ; D makes a
long pass to C ; etc.
Focusing on the quality of the long passes After his long pass, A goes to D ( and D to
and one touch volley passes.
A) ; after his long pass, B goes to C ( and
C to B).
Equipment : balls.
Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- adapting distance between players
depending on age and level

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3133
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing + crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass

A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and


makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D ; D shoots at the goal
(controlling or not the ball).
After his pass, A goes to C ; after his
pass, B goes to D ; after his pass C goes
to A ; after his shot, D goes to B.

Long pass in the air


Controlling + shooting
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass and on quality of controls and
crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- good weight and accuracy in passes

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2010 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3137 / Long passing and crossing


3134 / Long passing and crossing
3138 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2010
Speed
Speed

Reaction speed:

Reaction speed

Groups of 2 players then 3 players.


Two players are 3 yards away from each
other each holding a stick.
At the signal, they release one's stick and
catching teammate's stick before it falls.
Same game with 3 players.

Equipment: sticks.

10 min

Variations:
- at the sonorous signal (Go!)
- Visual signal: at the start of a determined
player and in the way he chose

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3137
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B ; B passes back
to C with one touch ; C makes a long pass
to D ; D passes to A ; etc.
Changing roles regularly.

Long pass in the air


One touch volley pass

15 min

Focusing on the quality of the long passes Instructions :


and one touch volley passes.
- working on right and left foot
Equipment : balls, cones.
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- adapting distance between A and B and
between C and D

Technical 3134
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B ; B passes back
to C with one touch ; C passes back to B ;
B makes a long pass to A ; A passes back
to C ; etc. C runs from A to B to pass the
ball back.
Changing roles regularly.

Long pass in the air


One touch volley pass
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass and on quality of the one touch
volley pass.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- long pass with the instep
- alternating long passes with right and left
foot
- adapting distance between A and B

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3138
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Long passing + one touch passing +


crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
One touch volley pass

A makes a long pass to B (then A runs in


front of the goal to receive the cross) ;
B passes back to C in one touch ; C
crosses to A ; A shoots at the goal (with or
without control).

Crossing + shooting
Instructions :
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, one touch volley passes and
crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

- working on right and left foot


- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- doubling positions depending on number
of players (doubling at least A)
- changing roles regularly.

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1016 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3136 / Long passing and crossing


3140 / Long passing and crossing

20 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1016
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Getting open

50x30 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
6 vs 6 stop-ball (or more depending on
the number of players). To score, stop the
ball in the zone opposed to one's camp.
Players don't wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

Playing forward
Equipment: 1 ball, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- looking around

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3136
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Technical course with long passes and


crosses :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
Controlling
Crossing + shooting
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, controls and crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Controlling, long passing, crossing and


shooting sequences. Goals are about 35
yards away from each other.
A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and
makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D who shoots at the goal with
or without control.
(At the same time, A' makes a long pass
to B' ; B' controls and makes a long pass
to C' ; C' controls and crosses to D' who
shoots.
After the pass, the player moves to the
next position : A goes to B ; B to C ; D to
A' ; A' to B' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on number
of players. Non stop course.

Technical 3140
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Crossing and finishing :

Crossing

30x20 yard field with 2 outside alleys (3


yards).
4 vs 4 (3 players + 1 keeper) plus 1 player
in each outside alley who always plays
with the team who passes the ball to him.
Players can score after a cross only.

Finishing
Focusing on the quality of crosses and on
finishing.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

20 min

Instructions :
- passing the ball to the outside player as
soon as a team gets the ball back
- looking for the cross quickly
- finishing

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1019 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2016 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4060 / Direction of play


4064 / Direction of play
4061 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1019
Tactical game
Tactical game

Doors game:

Looking around

40x30 yard field with small doors (2


yards).
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). To score, dribble the
ball through one of the doors.
After a goal, the play is still on but it is
forbidden to score twice in a row on the
same door.

Getting open
Dribbling the ball
Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Physical 2016
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercises:

Agility

Bars (or cones) are placed on the field


(about 20 inches between cones or bars).

10 min

Frequency
Race instructions:
Equipment: cones or bars.
- 2 steps (1 right foot and 1 left foot)
between cones
- going forward 2 cones then stepping
back one cone; going forward 2 cones
then stepping back one cone; etc.
Variations:
First exercise: player faces the course
Second exercise: player moves laterally

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4060
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

4 vs 3 keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

20x10 yard field (two 10x10 yard squares


side to side). Four players (outside the
squares) try to keep possession of the ball
- choosing in priority the forward solution
against three defenders trying to get it
back.
- if there is no forward solution : playing
Passes between players must be made at
laterally
least through one of both squares.
Two of the defenders have to stay in their
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate square and the third defender can defend
to play with the support. The ball carrier
on both squares.
must always have a support.
The player who loses the ball becomes
defender. To score, passing the ball from
Looking for the outnumber in the
A to B (or B to A) with or without the help
redirection of play.
of C and D.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Variations :
- free play
- players are limited to 3 touches

Tactical 4064
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 captains game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

35x20 yard field with 2 zones (3 yards) at


the extremities.
4 vs 4 game inside the field. To score, the
team has to pass the ball to the fifth
player (the captain) who is in the opposite
zone. The team scores one point of the
captain have the ball under control inside
the zone.
Changing captains regularly. When a
team scores, the captain restarts the play
for the other team.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

15 min

Instruction :
- choosing the forward solution in priority

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4061
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

6 vs 4 keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

20x20 yard field. Make 2 teams of 6


players.
4 vs 4 inside the field + 2 players of each
- choosing in priority the forward solution
team on the sides. (see diagram)
To score, reds have to bring the ball from
- if there is no forward solution : playing
A to B (or B to A) ; yellows from C to D (or
laterally
D to C).
Changing outside players every 3
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate minutes.
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support.
Variations :
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

- free play
- limitation of the number of touches
depending on level of players

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1030 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2011 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4055 / Direction of play


4053 / Direction of play
4052 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1030
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 yard field with 4 small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group). 2 goals on each side. Each team
attacks and defends 2 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2011
Speed
Speed

Sprint and shot:

running speed

2 goals are 26 yards away from each


other. Have 2 teams.
A passes the ball through a small goal (2
yards) then sprints to get it back and
shoot in the opposite goal.
B does the same at the other side.
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the goal first. After the shot, A goes
behind blues and B behind reds.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- shooting right foot
- shooting left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4055
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

12 yard ray circular field. Three small


goals (2 yards) are set up like on the
diagram.
4 vs 4 game. Each team attacks and
defends the 3 goals.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :

- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate - if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
to play with the support. The ball carrier
ball other side
must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Tactical 4053
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

4 vs 4 game on a 25x25 yard field with


small goals (2 yards).
Each team attacks and defends 2 goals.
Shooting allowed on both goals.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.

15 min

Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and orientating it other side

Looking for the outnumber in the


redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4052
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 35x20 yards wider than


longer field.
Each team attacks and defends 3 small
goals (2 yards).

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

15 min

To score :
- in the outside goals : dribbling the ball
through
- in the middle goal : free (shooting
allowed)
Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and directing it to the other side

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1034 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2013 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4054 / Direction of play


4065 / Direction of play
4056 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1034
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game without pennies:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.
Players do not wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

- small field
Looking around
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins but kick-ins
- looking around

Physical 2013
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercise:

Speed agility

First exercise: two lines (lines or bars)


parallel, 20 inches from each other:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step outside the lines, and left foot step
and right foot step inside the lines (see
diagram)
Second exercise: using the outside field
line or bars:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step inside the field, and left foot step and
right foot step outside the field (see
diagram)

Frequence
Equipment: cones or bars.

10 min

Instructions:
- vivacity
- dynamism

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4054
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

4 vs 4 game on a 35x20 yard field with 2


yard zones at the extremities.
To score, stopping the ball in the opposite
zone.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :

- respecting priorities in the Direction of


- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate play to go to score
to play with support. The ball carrier must
always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Tactical 4065
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 gates game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 40x30 yard field.


Four 3 yard gates are set up near each
corner of the field.
To score, the player has to pass to one of
his teammates through one of the 4 gates.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.

15 min

Instructions :
- a team is not allowed to score twice in a
row on the same gate
- if it is stuck on one side, redirecting the
ball to the other side

Looking for the outnumber in the


redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4056
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

35x20 yard field wider than longer with a 3


yard zone at the extremities.
5 vs 5 game. To score, stopping the ball
in the opposite zone.
Respecting priorities in the Direction of
play to go to score.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
- if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
must always have a support.
ball other side
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1022 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2001 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3122 / Heading
3123 / Heading
3125 / Heading

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1022
The touch
The touch

Juggling test:

Juggling

Balance

2 players: one player juggles and the


other one counts.
3 attempts per player with each juggling
variation (keep the highest score).
Keeping track of the results.

Coordination

Variations:

Equipment: balls.

- Right foot
- Left foot
- Header
- Free

Individual control of the ball

15 min

- etc.

Physical 2001
Speed
Speed

Speed tests:

running speed

Speed: 40 meters timed.


Going back and forth speed: 4x10m
timed.
One attempt on each course.
Keeping track of times to compare them
to previous tests.

Equipment: cones, decameter.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3122
Heading
Heading

15 min

Passing and shoting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing with the Groups of 3 players. A 8x8 yard field with
head.
2 (about 4 yards) goals per group.
A throws the ball to B ; B makes a lead
Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on pass to A with a header ; A tries to score
the form 'prepare and strike'
on C with a header.
Then C throws the ball to B who makes a
Equipment : balls, cones.
lead pass to C with a header ; C tries to
score on A with a header.
Changing roles regularly.

Technical 3123
Heading
Heading

Shooting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Shooting with


the head.

A throws a lead pass to B who attacks the


ball and shoot at the goal with a header.

20 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on Variations :


the form 'prepare and strike'
Variation 1 : ball coming from the right +
Equipment : balls, cones.
header (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the left +
header

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3125
Heading
Heading

3 vs 3 heading game :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing and


shooting with the head.

15x15 yard field with goals.


Two teams play against each other : 3
players + 1 keeper per team.

20 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on


the form 'prepare and strike'
Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

- passing the ball with the head


- scoring with a header
- when the ball falls, picking up the ball
with the hands and passing it with the
head

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1024 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3126 / Volleying
3130 / Volleying
3131 / Volleying

10 min
20 min
15 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1024
The touch
The touch

Soccer tennis:

Controlling an air ball

2 vs 2 game. Two 6 square yards per


side.
At the beginning, allow 2 bounces then
limiting to one bounce only. The bounce
can be used whenever the players want.
Playing like volleyball: 2 passes maximum
and passing the ball to the other side.
The serve, from behind the back line, is a
pass to the opponent.
Net = barriers, cones, string, etc. or 3
yards space with cones between camps.

Improving the touch


Equipment: balls, cones, net or barriers.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- limiting to 1 or 2 touches
- adapting rules to the level of the players
- playing 1 vs 1, 2 vs 2 or 3 vs 3

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3126
Volleying
Volleying

Volley passing :

Volley passing
Focusing on the volley form.

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face, A throws the ball to B who
volleys it back to A.

Equipment : balls.

Volleys to make :

10 min

- inside right foot


- inside left foot
- instep tight foot
- instep left foot
Instructions :
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

Technical 3130
Volleying
Volleying

Crossing + volleying :

Crossing

A crosses to B ; B attacks the ball and


volleys it in the goal. Then A' crosses to B'
who attaks the ball and volleys it. Etc.

Volley shooting

20 min

Focusing on the volley form. Crossing and Variations :


volley shooting.
Variation 1 : volleying a ball coming from
Equipment : balls, cones.
the right
Variation 2 : volleying a ball coming from
the left
Instructions :
- volleying right and left foot
- A and A' cross with their good foot
- throwing the ball if players can not cross

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3131
Volleying
Volleying

Acrobatic volleying :

Volley shooting. Bicycle kicks.

B is back to the goal ; A throws the ball to


B ; B makes an acrobatic volley.

15 min

Focusing on the volley form.


Variations (the player choses) :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- bicycle kick
- acrobatic volley
Comments :
- demonstrating if possible
- explaining the good form of the bicycle
kick

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Yearly of 56 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 29 : Creating space

Session 2 : No printed

Session 30 : Creating space

Session 3 : No printed

Session 31 : One touch play

Session 4 : No printed

Session 32 : One touch play

Session 5 : No printed

Session 33 : No printed

Session 6 : No printed

Session 34 : No printed

Session 7 : No printed

Session 35 : No printed

Session 8 : No printed

Session 36 : No printed

Session 9 : No printed

Session 37 : No printed

Session 10 : No printed

Session 38 : No printed

Session 11 : No printed

Session 39 : No printed

Session 12 : No printed

Session 40 : No printed

Session 13 : No printed

Session 41 : No printed

Session 14 : No printed

Session 42 : No printed

Session 15 : No printed

Session 43 : No printed

Session 16 : No printed

Session 44 : No printed

Session 17 : No printed

Session 45 : No printed

Session 18 : No printed

Session 46 : No printed

Session 19 : No printed

Session 47 : No printed

Session 20 : No printed

Session 48 : No printed

Session 21 : No printed

Session 49 : No printed

Session 22 : No printed

Session 50 : No printed

Session 23 : No printed

Session 51 : No printed

Session 24 : No printed

Session 52 : No printed

Session 25 : Creating space

Session 53 : No printed

Session 26 : Creating space

Session 54 : No printed

Session 27 : Creating space

Session 55 : No printed

Session 28 : Creating space

Session 56 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1015 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2003 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4002 / Getting open


4005 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1015
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Keeping possession of the ball

60x40 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
Two teams play against each other (6v6
or more) depending on the number of
players. Keepers are in the zone opposed
to their camp.
To score, the keeper has to catch an air
pass without releasing it.

Playing forward
Keeper throw
Long air pass

15 min

Equipment: 1 ball, pennies (2 colors).


Instructions:
- free play
- after a goal and when there is a goal
kick, the keeper throws the ball for the
other team
- no corner kick (throw from the keeper to
the opposite team)

Physical 2003
Speed
Speed

Sprinting and shooting:

running speed

2 goals face to face (26 yards) with


keepers.
A passes the ball to B and B passes the
ball to A.
After their pass, A and B sprint to receive
the ball from their teammate and shoot at
the goal (First time shot).
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the net first. After the shot, A goes to B
and B goes to A.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- passing in front of oneself and sprinting
diagonally (diagram)
- passing diagonally and sprinting straight
ahead

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4002
Getting open
Getting open

4 vs 2 keep-away:

Focusing on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group, a


15x15 yard field (with a diagonal) per
group.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against two defenders who try to get it
back.
Each defender has to stay in one's
triangle.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- Have teams of 2 players: both players of


the team that loses the ball become
defenders
- only the player who loses the ball
becomes defender

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- leading players in their moves if
necessary
- helping the ball carrier

Tactical 4005
Getting open
Getting open

6 vs 2 keep-away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Making teams of 2 players. 20x20 square


yard field.
2 vs 2 inside the field. The team with the
ball tries to keep possession of it with the
help of 4 outside players who always play
with the team who has the ball.
Changing teams in the middle every 2
minutes.
Counting number of passes: at the end of
the game, the team that made the most
passes consecutively without losing the
ball wins.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

15 min

Variations:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (4
colors).

- outside players are limited to 2 then 1


touch
- outside players cannot pass to each
other
- only passes between inside players
count as a point

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1033 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2020 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4012 / Getting open


4018 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open


5060 / Free play

20 min
20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1033
Small sided games
Small sided games

3 vs 3 game:

- few players

30x20 yard field with small goals (2 yards


or bigger depending on the age group)
and a impenetrable box (2x3 yards) in
front of each goal.
To score, the player must be in the
opponents half. Nobody is allowed to step
inside the box in front of the goals.
3 vs 3 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2020
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Relay race :

Running speed

Making 2 teams. Races.


The player, holding a ball in his hands,
runs through the course as fast as
possible following the instructions then
gives the ball to the next player. This
player does the same. And on and on until
every player has done it.
Doing several rounds.

Speed agility
Equipment : bars, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations :
- shuffle between bars then standing
jumps over each cone + shuffle between
bars then sprint up to the teammate
- same running backward then sprint up to
the teammate

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4012
Getting open
Getting open

Checkers game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

20x15 yard field split in 5x5 square yards.


Two teams of 6 players take place on the
field like on the diagram. Each player has
to stay in their own square delimited per
cones.
The team that has the ball tries to keep it.
1 point for the team that makes 10 passes
consecutively.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- free play
- players have 4 seconds to release the
ball
- no voice communication

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4018
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 2 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

35x25 yard field. 5 teams of 2 players.


Four teams try to keep possession of the
ball against one team that tries to get it
back. A
The team losing the ball becomes the
defending team.
diagram: Red, Blue, Green and Yellow
play together against White.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Instructions:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- looking for safety


- playing the ball where there are less
opponents
- looking for and creating space

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (5


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 min

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

Match 5060
Free play
Free play

8 vs 8 game :

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Free play.
No specific instructions.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 min

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4015 / Getting open


4016 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4015
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking waves:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Teams of 3 players.
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper). The
Yellow team is waiting in the midfield.
When the play is over: the Blue team
goes to the midfield and waits; the Red
team defends; the Yellow team attacks.
If the defense gets the ball back; it has to
play it in the feet of one of the player of
the waiting team.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- asking the ball carrier to challenge the
defense
- asking other players to spread out to
create space

Tactical 4016
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. 35x20 yard field per


group (see diagram).
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper).
When the play is over: the Red team goes
back to defense (2 players and 1 keeper);
the Blue team attacks (3 players).

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Instruction:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- no counter-attack (if a defender gets the


ball back, he has to pass it back to his
keeper, giving time to the opponent to go
back in defense

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1035 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2015 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4006 / Getting open


4010 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1035
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age of group)
placed inside the goaline (players can
play behind the goals). Players can score
in both of the goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2015
Coordination
Coordination

Agility and vivacity:

Agility

Have groups of 2 players.


Each player has a pennie placed on the
back (half in the short).
Duel: trying to take opponent's pennie
while keeping one's own pennie. One
point scored each time a player takes the
pinnie.
1 minute games. Changing opponent
regularly.

Vivacity
Fake
Equipment: pennies (1 color).

10 min

Variation:
- no pennie: to score, touching one of the
opponent's feet

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4006
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 4 game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Making 3 teams of 4 players. 25x25


square yard field.
4 vs 4 inside the field.
The team that has the ball tries to keep
possession of it with the help of the
outside players who always play with the
team who has the ball.
Changing middle teams every 3 minutes.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- outside players are limited to 2 touches


then 1 touch
- outside players cannot pass to each
other
- only passes between inside players
count as a point

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4010
Getting open
Getting open

6 vs 4 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

20x20 square yard field split in 4 squares.


6 players (4 outside and 2 inside the field)
try to keep possession of the ball against
4 defenders (inside the field).
Each defender has to stay in their square.
Have 5 teams of 2 players. Changing
roles of players every 2 minutes.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Variations:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder


- 1 point per 1-2 made between
midfielders

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1017 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2006 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4019 / Getting open


4014 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1017
Tactical game
Tactical game

Keep-away 4 vs 2:

Passing

12x12 yard field. Four players are outside


of the field and try to keep possession of
the ball. Two defenders are inside the
field and try to intercept the ball.
The player who loses the ball becomes
defender.

Getting open
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- 2 touches maximum

Physical 2006
Speed
Speed

Elimination race:

Reaction speed

All the players are inside of a 6-yard


diameter circle.
Cones are 10 yards away around the
circle. There are 2 cones more than there
are players.
At the sonorous signal, players run up to a
cone and stop at the cone.
The 2 players who are not at a cone are
eliminated.
Start again taking away 2 more cones,
etc. The players remaining at the end win.
Do several rounds.

Running speed
Equipment: cones.

10 min

Variations:
- players jog in the circle
- players move on all four in the circle
- players crawl in the circle

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4019
Getting open
Getting open

9 vs 3 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

35x25 yard field. 4 teams of 3 players.


Three teams try to keep possession of the
ball against one team that tries to get it
back. A
The team losing the ball becomes the
defending team.
diagram: Red, Green and Yellow play
together against White.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Instructions:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- looking for safety


- playing the ball where there are less
opponents
- looking for and creating space

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (4


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4014
Getting open
Getting open

Gates game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

35x25 yard field with five 2 yard gates


spread out all over the field.
4 vs 4 game. To score, a player has to
make a pass to a teammate through one
of the 5 gates.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Variations:
- players are not allowed to score twice in
a row on the same gate
- adding or taking off a gate

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1031 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2011 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4021 / Getting open


4020 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1031
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 square yard field with 4 goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group).
Both teams can score on all the goals.
Each team attacks and defends 4 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- substitute throw-ins with corner-kicks

Physical 2011
Speed
Speed

Sprint and shot:

running speed

2 goals are 26 yards away from each


other. Have 2 teams.
A passes the ball through a small goal (2
yards) then sprints to get it back and
shoot in the opposite goal.
B does the same at the other side.
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the goal first. After the shot, A goes
behind blues and B behind reds.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- shooting right foot
- shooting left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4021
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 3 directed stop-ball:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Teams of 3 players. 20x25 yard fields


wider than longer with areas at 2
extremities.
3 vs 3 game. To score, stop the ball in the
opposite area.
Asking players to constantly help and
offer solutions to the ball carrier.
Changing opponent every 3 minutes if
there are several fields.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

- Giving/creating oneself free space


Variations:
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- free play
- players are limited to 2 touches

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

Tactical 4020
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 3 directed game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2-3


yards).
3 vs 3 game.
Asking players to constantly help and
offer solutions to the ball carrier.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- stopping the game to explain and
demonstrate if necessary

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1029 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3088 / One touch play


3089 / One touch play
3105 / One touch play

10 min
10 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1029
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3088
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : passing using one touch
only. Using right and left foot.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

10 min

Instructions :
- 7-8 yards space between players
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

Technical 3089
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


Triangle : passing the ball to each other
using only one touch (no control).

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

10 min

Instructions :
- 7-8 yards space between players
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3105
One touch play
One touch play

One touch shooting :

First time shot

A passes to B ; B attacks the ball and


shoots (First time shot).

Focusing on the quality of the shot paying


attention to the body position.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left +
shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right +
shot left foot
Coaching points :
- attacking the ball
- paying attention to the body position

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1013 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2014 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3088 / One touch play


3091 / One touch play
3113 / One touch play

10 min
10 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1013
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

One touch, pass back:

Dribbling the ball

Players evolve in a 20x20 square yard


field.
Half of the players have a ball.
Players with a ball dribble and pass to
players without a ball who pass back to
them with one touch to their feet.
Changing roles regularly.

Pass
One touch, pass back
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- accurate and well directed passes
- players without ball jog
- composure in one touch passes back
Variations:
- passing and passing back with the less
stronger foot

Physical 2014
Coordination
Coordination

Running techniques :

Running techniques

Jumps

Two or three lines of players one behind


another.
The trainer runs with the players and
gives the instructions alternating running
techniques.

Lateralization

Running techniques :

Equipment : none.

- high knees ; heel-butt touches


-shuffle (Forward; backward)
-criss-cross (Forward; backward)
- running backward, forward, and
backward, etc.
- hopping on right and left feet (forward;
backward)
-roll-over ; flexion ; extension
- etc.

Agility

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3088
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : passing using one touch
only. Using right and left foot.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

10 min

Instructions :
- 7-8 yards space between players
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

Technical 3091
One touch play
One touch play

One touch give-and-go :

One touch pass


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


One touch give-and-go : players are
limited to one touch.
The player passes the ball and runs
behind the last player of the opposite line.

- winning time

Instructions :

- beating the opponent

- keeping the ball on the ground


- using right and left foot

10 min

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3113
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing and shooting :

First time shot

A passes to B ; B makes a one touch lead


pass to A ; A goes around the cone and
takes a First time shot at the goal.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.
Equipment : balls, cones, sticks.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left +
shot right foot ( see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right +
shot left foot

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Yearly of 56 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 29 : No printed

Session 2 : No printed

Session 30 : No printed

Session 3 : No printed

Session 31 : No printed

Session 4 : No printed

Session 32 : No printed

Session 5 : No printed

Session 33 : One touch play

Session 6 : No printed

Session 34 : One touch play

Session 7 : No printed

Session 35 : One touch play

Session 8 : No printed

Session 36 : One touch play

Session 9 : No printed

Session 37 : One touch play

Session 10 : No printed

Session 38 : One touch play

Session 11 : No printed

Session 39 : Long passing and crossing

Session 12 : No printed

Session 40 : Long passing and crossing

Session 13 : No printed

Session 41 : No printed

Session 14 : No printed

Session 42 : No printed

Session 15 : No printed

Session 43 : No printed

Session 16 : No printed

Session 44 : No printed

Session 17 : No printed

Session 45 : No printed

Session 18 : No printed

Session 46 : No printed

Session 19 : No printed

Session 47 : No printed

Session 20 : No printed

Session 48 : No printed

Session 21 : No printed

Session 49 : No printed

Session 22 : No printed

Session 50 : No printed

Session 23 : No printed

Session 51 : No printed

Session 24 : No printed

Session 52 : No printed

Session 25 : No printed

Session 53 : No printed

Session 26 : No printed

Session 54 : No printed

Session 27 : No printed

Session 55 : No printed

Session 28 : No printed

Session 56 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 33 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1014 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2010 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3095 / One touch play


3092 / One touch play
3109 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 33 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1014
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The 1-2:

1-2

Players evolve in a 30x20 yard field. Half


of the players have a ball.
Ball carriers play 1-2 with players without
a ball.
A passes to B and asks for the ball,
sprinting; B makes a lead pass with one
touch.
If, after his pass, A doesn't ask for the
ball, B controls it and becomes a ball
carrier.

Asking for the ball


One touch
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- accurate and well directed passes
- players without ball jog and ask for the
ball
- composure in one touch passes back

Physical 2010
Speed
Speed

Reaction speed:

Reaction speed

Groups of 2 players then 3 players.


Two players are 3 yards away from each
other each holding a stick.
At the signal, they release one's stick and
catching teammate's stick before it falls.
Same game with 3 players.

Equipment: sticks.

10 min

Variations:
- at the sonorous signal (Go!)
- Visual signal: at the start of a determined
player and in the way he chose

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 33 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3095
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A ; A
passes to C (A runs behind C). C passes
to B who passes back to C ; etc.
Players are limited to one touch.
Changing B regularly.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

15 min

- winning time
Instructions :
- beating the opponent
- accelerating the play

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

Equipment : balls, cones.

Technical 3092
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 5 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who makes a lead pass to
A ; A passes to C who makes a lead pass
to A ; A passes to D and runs behind D.
D does the same course like A in the
other direction.
Changing position regularly.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- no control (one touch pass)


- being on one's toes when receiving the
ball
- attacking the ball

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 min

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 33 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3109
One touch play
One touch play

One touch shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B ; B makes a lead pass to A


; A passes to C who makes a lead pass to
A ; A shoots at the goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the shots
paying attention at the position of the
body.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- players are limited to one touch
- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot
- changing positions regularly

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 34 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1030 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2013 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3093 / One touch play


3090 / One touch play
3107 / One touch play

10 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 34 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1030
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 yard field with 4 small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group). 2 goals on each side. Each team
attacks and defends 2 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2013
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercise:

Speed agility

First exercise: two lines (lines or bars)


parallel, 20 inches from each other:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step outside the lines, and left foot step
and right foot step inside the lines (see
diagram)
Second exercise: using the outside field
line or bars:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step inside the field, and left foot step and
right foot step outside the field (see
diagram)

Frequence
Equipment: cones or bars.

10 min

Instructions:
- vivacity
- dynamism

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 34 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3093
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


Triangle : passing the ball to each other
using only one touch (no control).
Players can change the direction of
passes whenever they want.

- winning time

Instructions :

- beating the opponent

- 7-8 yards space between players


- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play

10 min

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3090
One touch play
One touch play

4 vs 1 keepaway (no control) :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 5 players with one ball per


group. 10x10 yard field.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against one defender.
The player who loses the ball becomes
the defender.
Players are limited to one touch.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

15 min

Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 34 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3107
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passes and shots course :

One touch pass

A passes to B. B attacks the ball and


passes back to A who shoots at the goal.
A goes to B and B goes to A.
Same for C and D on the other goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

Instructions :

Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch


- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot

20 min

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 35 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1007 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2018 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3099 / One touch play


3101 / One touch play
3111 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 35 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1007
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The one-two:

1-2

All the players are inside a 30x30 square


yard area. Groups of 2 players and one
ball per group.
The objective is to make 1-2. To make a
valuable 1-2, player must pass to his
teammate and receive a lead pass after
having run behind another player. 1 point
per good 1-2.

Asking for a lead pass


Asking for the ball
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- all players must be moving
- players have to pass the ball and
accelerate, asking for a lead pass
- being precise in one-touch passes

Physical 2018
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Miror game :

Speed agility

Setting several fields composed of two


7x7 yard square. 2 players per field.
The 2 players face each other each of
them being in the middle of his square.
A leads the game : A runs and touches a
cone with his hand. B plays the reflection
of A.
Going slowly at the beginning then fast
when the game is well understood.
Changing role every 30 seconds.

Vivacity
Reaction speed
Coordination
Equipment : cones.

10 min

Instructions :
- A must always go to touch a cone
- A and B are always facing each other
Variation :
- B tries to imitate A but when A goes
forward B has to go backward and when
A goes backward B has to go forward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 35 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3099
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 3 players. Two balls per group.


Both A and C have a ball. A passes to B
who passes back to A in one touch then
turns around ; C passes to B who passes
back to C then turns around ; etc.
B must be on one's toes constantly.
Changing B regularly.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- one touch passing (no control)


- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Equipment : balls.

15 min

Technical 3101
One touch play
One touch play

/4 one touch passing exercise :

One touch pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A with
one touch ; A passes diagonally to C ; C
passes to D who passes back to C ; C
passes diagonally to B ; etc. (see
diagram)
After his pass B runs in A and A in B ;
after his pass D runs in C and C in D.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

15 min

- beating the opponent


Instructions :
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls, cones.

- one touch passing (no control)


- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 35 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3111
One touch play
One touch play

One touch shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B then makes an overlap run


behind B ; B passes to C ; C passes to A
who shoots.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : pass from C to A comes from
the left + shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : pass from C to A comes from
the right + shot left foot
Instructions :
- players are limited to one touch
- good weight and accuracy in one touch
passes
- changing positions regularly : shooters,
passers ; ball-boys

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 36 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1032 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2012 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3104 / One touch play


3096 / One touch play
3112 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 36 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1032
Small sided games
Small sided games

3 vs 3 game:

- few players

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group) with no keeper.
3 vs 3 game; 3 minutes per game; rotate
opponent.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2012
Coordination
Coordination

Coordination course:

Speed agility

Starting every 3 seconds, players run


through the course (see diagram)
respecting the following instructions.

Equipment: cones, sticks.

10 min

Course instructions:
A: running through sticks without touching
them
B: 3xs hopping on right foot; 3xs hopping
on left foot
C: running backward
D: stepping on the right and on the left of
the bars (never between them)
E: between bars going forward
F: shuffle between bars going backward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 36 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3104
One touch play
One touch play

One-two :

One touch pass

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group.


Players take place like on the diagram.
A dribbles the ball, eliminates the stick,
making a one-two with B and passes to C
in one touch. Then C does the same in
the other way with D and passes to E ;
etc.
Changing B and D regularly.
Challenging the stick, asking for the
one-two passing to the teammate and
accelerating just after the pass.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy).
Asking for the one-two.
Making a one touch lead pass
Equipment : balls, cones, sticks.

15 min

Instructions :
- 1-2 with one touch passing
- B and D are on one's toes
- good weight and accuracy in one touch
passes

Technical 3096
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

- beating the opponent

Groups of 6 players. Two balls per group.


A passes to B who passes with the
outside to C ; B runs around F ; C passes
back to B ; B passes to D.
(At the same time, D passed to F who
passed outside to E ; F run around B ; E
passed back to F ; F passed to A)
Then A passes to F ; etc. (At the same
time, D passes to B ; etc.)

- accelerating the play

Instructions :

Equipment : balls, cones.

- A and D starts at the same time


- alternating the way of rotation to use
outside right foot and left foot
- changing positions regularly

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 min

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 36 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3112
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing and shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B who passes back to A ; A


makes a soft in-depth pass to B ; B
passes laterally to C who shoots at the
goal.
Players are limited to one touch.
Changing positions regularly.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

20 min

Variations :
Equipment : balls, cones.
Variation 1 : pass from A to C comes from
the right + shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : pass from A to C comes from
the left + shot left foot

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 37 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1035 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2004 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3100 / One touch play


3097 / One touch play
3115 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 37 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1035
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age of group)
placed inside the goaline (players can
play behind the goals). Players can score
in both of the goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2004
Speed
Speed

Sprint duel:

reacting to a sonorous signal

Races per 2 players. 6 and 8-yard spaces


between lines 1, 2, and 3.
At the sonorous signal, both players
complete the following course
(determined by 3 lines) as fast as
possible:
sprinting from 1 to 2; running backward
from 2 to 1 then sprinting up to the line 3.
1 point for the team per duel won. A duel
at a time (no relay).

Running speed
Equipment: cones, pennies (2 colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 37 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3100
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A in
one touch ; A passes to C ; C passes to B
who just turned around ; B passes back to
C ; C passes to A ; et.
All passes are made with one touch. B
turns around and let the ball go past him
after each of his pass.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

15 min

- beating the opponent


Instructions :
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch (no


control)
- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes

Technical 3097
One touch play
One touch play

5 vs 2 keepaway (no control) :

One touch pass

- accelerating the play

Groups of 7 players with one ball per


group. 10x10 yards squares. 5 players (4
outside + 1 inside the field) try to keep
possession of the ball against 2
defenders.
Each defender has to stay in his square.
A is allowed to play in both squares.
Players are limited to one touch (no
control play).
One point scored each time the midfielder
touches the ball without losing it.

Equipment : balls, cones.

Instructions :

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

15 min

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 37 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3115
One touch play
One touch play

Technical course :

First time shot

One touch passing and shooting


sequences. Setting players like on the
diagram.
A passes to B who passes to C ; C
passes to D who passes to E ; E shoots at
the goal. Everything in one touch (one
touch passing and shooting).
After a pass, the player moves to the next
position : A goes in B, B in C, ..., E in A.
Doubling positons if necessary.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- good weight and accuracy in one touch
passes
- being on one's toes

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 38 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1008 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2016 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3102 / One touch play


3114 / One touch play
3108 / One touch play

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 38 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1008
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The 1-2:

1-2

4 vs 4: two teams of 4 players play


against each other on a 20x20 square
yard field.
Keeping possession of the ball. Trying to
play 1-2 with their teammates. One point
scored per 1-2 correctly made.

Passing and moving


Asking for the ball

15 min

Asking for a lead pass


Instructions:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- passing and asking for the ball


- passing and accelerating
- concentration and application in
one-touch passes

Physical 2016
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercises:

Agility

Bars (or cones) are placed on the field


(about 20 inches between cones or bars).

10 min

Frequency
Race instructions:
Equipment: cones or bars.
- 2 steps (1 right foot and 1 left foot)
between cones
- going forward 2 cones then stepping
back one cone; going forward 2 cones
then stepping back one cone; etc.
Variations:
First exercise: player faces the course
Second exercise: player moves laterally

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 38 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3102
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Splitting players in 2 groups (red and


yellow). Reds take place like on the
diagram.
A passes to D who passes back to A's
feet ; then A passes with one touch to E
who passes back to A's feet ; A passes to
F who passes back to A's feet ; etc.
When F passed back to A, B starts and
does like A (B passes to D, etc.)
When every yellow player has done it A
restarts in the other way. Changing reds
and yellows roles regularly.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions :
- players are limited to one touch (no
control)
- being on one's toes
- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy

Technical 3114
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing and shooting :

First time shot

A passes to B ; B passes back to A and


asks for a depth pass ; A makes a lead
pass to B ; B passes to C who shoots at
the goal.
No control : one touch passes and First
time shots.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

20 min

Equipment : balls, cones, sticks.


Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left +
shot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right +
shot
Instructions :
- pass from A to C well measured out
- B runs around the stick before asking for
a in-depth pass

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 38 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3108
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passes and shots course :

One touch pass

A passes to B then runs in front of the


goal. B passes to A who makes a lead
pass to B. B shoots at the goal.
Same for C and D on the other goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

Instructions :

Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch


- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot

20 min

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 39 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1026 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2002 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3132 / Long passing


3135 / Long passing and crossing
3136 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 39 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1026
The touch
The touch

Juggling relay:

Controlling an air ball

Groups of 3 players with one ball per


group.
Team race relay.
A juggles through the slalom and passes
to B; B juggles through the slalom in the
other way and passes to C; etc.
If the ball falls, the player restarts at the
spot where the ball has fallen.

Improving the touch


Balance
Coordination

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones.


Variations:
- restarting from the beginning if the ball
falls
- going around each cone

Physical 2002
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball :

Reaction speed

Races per 2 players. 5 yards space


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint,
going around the cones of the slalom: the
first player arriving to the ball shoots.
1 point for the team per shot and one
bonus point per goal scored.
One duel at a time (no relay).

Running speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 39 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3132
Long passing
Long passing

Long pass :

Straight long pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : A makes a long pass to B ;
B controls the ball then makes a long
pass to A ; etc.

Long pass in the air


Focusing on the form of the long passes
and quality of the controls.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- working on long passes right and left
foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight long pass and high long
pass)
- adapting distance between A and B
- free first touch

Technical 3135
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Long passing + one touch passing +


crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
One touch volley pass
Crossing + shooting
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass, on quality of the one touch volley
passes and crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

A makes a long pass to B ; B makes a


one touch lead pass to A ; A crosses to C
; C shoots at the goal (with or without
controlling the ball) .
Doubling positions. 3 minutes per
position.
Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- good weight and accuracy in passes

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 39 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3136
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Technical course with long passes and


crosses :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
Controlling
Crossing + shooting
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, controls and crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Controlling, long passing, crossing and


shooting sequences. Goals are about 35
yards away from each other.
A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and
makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D who shoots at the goal with
or without control.
(At the same time, A' makes a long pass
to B' ; B' controls and makes a long pass
to C' ; C' controls and crosses to D' who
shoots.
After the pass, the player moves to the
next position : A goes to B ; B to C ; D to
A' ; A' to B' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on number
of players. Non stop course.

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 40 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1015 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2019 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3137 / Long passing and crossing


3139 / Long passing and crossing
3133 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 40 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1015
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Keeping possession of the ball

60x40 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
Two teams play against each other (6v6
or more) depending on the number of
players. Keepers are in the zone opposed
to their camp.
To score, the keeper has to catch an air
pass without releasing it.

Playing forward
Keeper throw
Long air pass

15 min

Equipment: 1 ball, pennies (2 colors).


Instructions:
- free play
- after a goal and when there is a goal
kick, the keeper throws the ball for the
other team
- no corner kick (throw from the keeper to
the opposite team)

Physical 2019
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Running techniques + sprint :

Running techniques

Setting 8 bars 20 inches from each other.


Players run through the course 2 by 2
following the trainer's instructions : each
pass is followed by a 10 yard sprint.

Jumps

10 min

Running speed
Instructions for the different round :
Equipment : bars, cones.
- one step between bars : very quick
- 2 steps (RF + LF) between bars : very
quick
- standing jumps between bars
- standing jumps with high knee changing
foot each step
- lateral run : 2 quick step between bars
- hopping right foot
- hopping left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 40 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3137
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B ; B passes back
to C with one touch ; C makes a long pass
to D ; D passes to A ; etc.
Changing roles regularly.

Long pass in the air


One touch volley pass

15 min

Focusing on the quality of the long passes Instructions :


and one touch volley passes.
- working on right and left foot
Equipment : balls, cones.
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- adapting distance between A and B and
between C and D

Technical 3139
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

15 min

Long passing + one touch passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B who passes
Long pass in the air
back to C in one touch ; C passes to B
who makes a long pass to D ; D passes
One touch volley pass
back to A ; A passes to D ; D makes a
long pass to C ; etc.
Focusing on the quality of the long passes After his long pass, A goes to D ( and D to
and one touch volley passes.
A) ; after his long pass, B goes to C ( and
C to B).
Equipment : balls.
Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- adapting distance between players
depending on age and level

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 40 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3133
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing + crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass

A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and


makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D ; D shoots at the goal
(controlling or not the ball).
After his pass, A goes to C ; after his
pass, B goes to D ; after his pass C goes
to A ; after his shot, D goes to B.

Long pass in the air


Controlling + shooting
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass and on quality of controls and
crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- good weight and accuracy in passes

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Yearly of 56 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 29 : No printed

Session 2 : No printed

Session 30 : No printed

Session 3 : No printed

Session 31 : No printed

Session 4 : No printed

Session 32 : No printed

Session 5 : No printed

Session 33 : No printed

Session 6 : No printed

Session 34 : No printed

Session 7 : No printed

Session 35 : No printed

Session 8 : No printed

Session 36 : No printed

Session 9 : No printed

Session 37 : No printed

Session 10 : No printed

Session 38 : No printed

Session 11 : No printed

Session 39 : No printed

Session 12 : No printed

Session 40 : No printed

Session 13 : No printed

Session 41 : Long passing and crossing

Session 14 : No printed

Session 42 : Long passing and crossing

Session 15 : No printed

Session 43 : Direction of play

Session 16 : No printed

Session 44 : Direction of play

Session 17 : No printed

Session 45 : Direction of play

Session 18 : No printed

Session 46 : Direction of play

Session 19 : No printed

Session 47 : Direction of play

Session 20 : No printed

Session 48 : Direction of play

Session 21 : No printed

Session 49 : No printed

Session 22 : No printed

Session 50 : No printed

Session 23 : No printed

Session 51 : No printed

Session 24 : No printed

Session 52 : No printed

Session 25 : No printed

Session 53 : No printed

Session 26 : No printed

Session 54 : No printed

Session 27 : No printed

Session 55 : No printed

Session 28 : No printed

Session 56 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 41 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1025 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2003 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3132 / Long passing


3134 / Long passing and crossing
3138 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 41 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1025
The touch
The touch

Per 2 juggling and shooting:

Controlling a air ball

Volleying

At mid-field, Groups of 2 players with one


ball per group.
Two players juggle together toward the
goal. About 15 yards away from the goal,
one of the players takes a shot (volleying).

Equipment: balls.

Variations:

Improving the touch

15 min

- free play
- 2 touches (controlling and passing)
- 1 touch

Physical 2003
Speed
Speed

Sprinting and shooting:

running speed

2 goals face to face (26 yards) with


keepers.
A passes the ball to B and B passes the
ball to A.
After their pass, A and B sprint to receive
the ball from their teammate and shoot at
the goal (First time shot).
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the net first. After the shot, A goes to B
and B goes to A.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- passing in front of oneself and sprinting
diagonally (diagram)
- passing diagonally and sprinting straight
ahead

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 41 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3132
Long passing
Long passing

Long pass :

Straight long pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : A makes a long pass to B ;
B controls the ball then makes a long
pass to A ; etc.

Long pass in the air


Focusing on the form of the long passes
and quality of the controls.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- working on long passes right and left
foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight long pass and high long
pass)
- adapting distance between A and B
- free first touch

Technical 3134
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B ; B passes back
to C with one touch ; C passes back to B ;
B makes a long pass to A ; A passes back
to C ; etc. C runs from A to B to pass the
ball back.
Changing roles regularly.

Long pass in the air


One touch volley pass
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass and on quality of the one touch
volley pass.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- long pass with the instep
- alternating long passes with right and left
foot
- adapting distance between A and B

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 41 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3138
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Long passing + one touch passing +


crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
One touch volley pass

A makes a long pass to B (then A runs in


front of the goal to receive the cross) ;
B passes back to C in one touch ; C
crosses to A ; A shoots at the goal (with or
without control).

Crossing + shooting
Instructions :
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, one touch volley passes and
crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

- working on right and left foot


- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- doubling positions depending on number
of players (doubling at least A)
- changing roles regularly.

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 42 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2020 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3136 / Long passing and crossing


3140 / Long passing and crossing

20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 42 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2020
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Relay race :

Running speed

Making 2 teams. Races.


The player, holding a ball in his hands,
runs through the course as fast as
possible following the instructions then
gives the ball to the next player. This
player does the same. And on and on until
every player has done it.
Doing several rounds.

Speed agility
Equipment : bars, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations :
- shuffle between bars then standing
jumps over each cone + shuffle between
bars then sprint up to the teammate
- same running backward then sprint up to
the teammate

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 42 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3136
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Technical course with long passes and


crosses :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
Controlling
Crossing + shooting
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, controls and crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Controlling, long passing, crossing and


shooting sequences. Goals are about 35
yards away from each other.
A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and
makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D who shoots at the goal with
or without control.
(At the same time, A' makes a long pass
to B' ; B' controls and makes a long pass
to C' ; C' controls and crosses to D' who
shoots.
After the pass, the player moves to the
next position : A goes to B ; B to C ; D to
A' ; A' to B' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on number
of players. Non stop course.

Technical 3140
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Crossing and finishing :

Crossing

30x20 yard field with 2 outside alleys (3


yards).
4 vs 4 (3 players + 1 keeper) plus 1 player
in each outside alley who always plays
with the team who passes the ball to him.
Players can score after a cross only.

Finishing
Focusing on the quality of crosses and on
finishing.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

20 min

Instructions :
- passing the ball to the outside player as
soon as a team gets the ball back
- looking for the cross quickly
- finishing

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 42 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Long passing and crossing

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 43 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1016 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4057 / Direction of play


4058 / Direction of play
4064 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 43 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1016
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Getting open

50x30 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
6 vs 6 stop-ball (or more depending on
the number of players). To score, stop the
ball in the zone opposed to one's camp.
Players don't wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

Playing forward
Equipment: 1 ball, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- looking around

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 43 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4057
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

4 vs 2 keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

20x10 yard field (two 10x10 yards square


side to side). Four players (outside the
squares) try to keep possession of the ball
- choosing in priority the forward solution
against two defenders who try to get it
back.
- if there is no forward solution : playing
Passes have to go through at least one of
laterally
both squares. Each defender has to stay
in his square.
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate The player who loses the ball becomes a
to play with the support. The ball carrier
defender.
must always have a support.
To score, bringing the ball from A to B or
from B to A with or without using C and D.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Variations :
Equipment : balls, cones.

- free play
- players are limited to 2 or 3 touches

Tactical 4058
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

Checker game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

20x15 yard field split in 5x5 yards squares


(see diagram). Two teams of 6 players in
the checkerboard and 2 players outside
- choosing in priority the forward solution
(A and B).
To score, bringing the ball from A to B or
- if there is no forward solution : playing
from B to A.
laterally
Each player has to stay in his square
delimited by disks.
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate If a team gets the ball back, it tries to keep
to play with the support. The ball carrier
possession of the ball but to score it still
must always have a support.
has to pass the ball from A (or B) to B (or
A).
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Variations :
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

- free play
- players have 4 secondes to release the
ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 43 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4064
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 captains game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

35x20 yard field with 2 zones (3 yards) at


the extremities.
4 vs 4 game inside the field. To score, the
team has to pass the ball to the fifth
player (the captain) who is in the opposite
zone. The team scores one point of the
captain have the ball under control inside
the zone.
Changing captains regularly. When a
team scores, the captain restarts the play
for the other team.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

15 min

Instruction :
- choosing the forward solution in priority

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 44 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1033 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2014 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4068 / Direction of play


4067 / Direction of play
4063 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 44 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1033
Small sided games
Small sided games

3 vs 3 game:

- few players

30x20 yard field with small goals (2 yards


or bigger depending on the age group)
and a impenetrable box (2x3 yards) in
front of each goal.
To score, the player must be in the
opponents half. Nobody is allowed to step
inside the box in front of the goals.
3 vs 3 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2014
Coordination
Coordination

Running techniques :

Running techniques

Jumps

Two or three lines of players one behind


another.
The trainer runs with the players and
gives the instructions alternating running
techniques.

Lateralization

Running techniques :

Equipment : none.

- high knees ; heel-butt touches


-shuffle (Forward; backward)
-criss-cross (Forward; backward)
- running backward, forward, and
backward, etc.
- hopping on right and left feet (forward;
backward)
-roll-over ; flexion ; extension
- etc.

Agility

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 44 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4068
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

3 vs 2 attacking waves :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

25x25 yard field with a 3 yard zone at the


end line.
Making teams of 3 players.
- choosing in priority the forward solution
The yellow team attacks the red team (2
defenders : the third player doesn't play).
- if there is no forward solution : playing
The blue team is waiting. 3 vs 2 attacking.
laterally
When the play is over, reds wait, yellows
defend (2 players) and blues attack
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate yellows.
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support.
Instructions :
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

- to score, stopping the ball in the zone


- if it is stuck on one side, redirecting the
ball other side

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (3


colors).

Tactical 4067
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

5 vs 3 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

30x25 yard field with 2 outside zones (3


yards).
3 vs 3 + 2 offensive supports. Offensive
- choosing in priority the forward solution
persons support always play with the
attacking team.
- if there is no forward solution : playing
Only supports are in the outside zones
laterally
(they have to stay in it).
5 vs 3 situation for the attacking team.
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate When a team attacks, the keeper plays as
to play with the support. The ball carrier
a sweeper.
must always have a support.
Instructions :
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
- using offensive supports
- orienting the play looking for outnumber
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (3
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 44 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4063
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 3 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

3 vs 3 on a 25x20 yard field with 2 zones


(2 yards) at the extremities.
The team which has the ball has 2
offensive supports who are outside of the
field.
Outside players are limited to 2 touches.
To score, stopping the ball in the opposite
zone.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

15 min

Instruction :
- looking for outnumber using outside
players (5 vs 3 situations for the attacking
team)

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 45 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1019 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2006 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4055 / Direction of play


4053 / Direction of play
4052 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 45 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1019
Tactical game
Tactical game

Doors game:

Looking around

40x30 yard field with small doors (2


yards).
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). To score, dribble the
ball through one of the doors.
After a goal, the play is still on but it is
forbidden to score twice in a row on the
same door.

Getting open
Dribbling the ball
Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Physical 2006
Speed
Speed

Elimination race:

Reaction speed

All the players are inside of a 6-yard


diameter circle.
Cones are 10 yards away around the
circle. There are 2 cones more than there
are players.
At the sonorous signal, players run up to a
cone and stop at the cone.
The 2 players who are not at a cone are
eliminated.
Start again taking away 2 more cones,
etc. The players remaining at the end win.
Do several rounds.

Running speed
Equipment: cones.

10 min

Variations:
- players jog in the circle
- players move on all four in the circle
- players crawl in the circle

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 45 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4055
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

12 yard ray circular field. Three small


goals (2 yards) are set up like on the
diagram.
4 vs 4 game. Each team attacks and
defends the 3 goals.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :

- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate - if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
to play with the support. The ball carrier
ball other side
must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Tactical 4053
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

4 vs 4 game on a 25x25 yard field with


small goals (2 yards).
Each team attacks and defends 2 goals.
Shooting allowed on both goals.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.

15 min

Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and orientating it other side

Looking for the outnumber in the


redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 45 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4052
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 35x20 yards wider than


longer field.
Each team attacks and defends 3 small
goals (2 yards).

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

15 min

To score :
- in the outside goals : dribbling the ball
through
- in the middle goal : free (shooting
allowed)
Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and directing it to the other side

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 46 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1030 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2015 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4059 / Direction of play


4054 / Direction of play
4056 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 46 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1030
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 yard field with 4 small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group). 2 goals on each side. Each team
attacks and defends 2 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2015
Coordination
Coordination

Agility and vivacity:

Agility

Have groups of 2 players.


Each player has a pennie placed on the
back (half in the short).
Duel: trying to take opponent's pennie
while keeping one's own pennie. One
point scored each time a player takes the
pinnie.
1 minute games. Changing opponent
regularly.

Vivacity
Fake
Equipment: pennies (1 color).

10 min

Variation:
- no pennie: to score, touching one of the
opponent's feet

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 46 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4059
Direction of play
Direction of play

6 vs 2 river keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

20x10 yard field split in 3 zones (2 yard


zone in the middle).
6 players try to keep possession of the
ball against 2 defenders who try to get it
back.
3 players take place in the zone A and 3
in the zone B. Defenders are in the middle
zone C. Each player has to stay in his
square.
To score a point, passing the ball from
zone A to B or B to A.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones.

15 min

Variations :
- player who loses the ball becomes
defender
- making team of 2 players and changing
the defending team every 2 minutes.

Tactical 4054
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

4 vs 4 game on a 35x20 yard field with 2


yard zones at the extremities.
To score, stopping the ball in the opposite
zone.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :

- respecting priorities in the Direction of


- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate play to go to score
to play with support. The ball carrier must
always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 46 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4056
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

35x20 yard field wider than longer with a 3


yard zone at the extremities.
5 vs 5 game. To score, stopping the ball
in the opposite zone.
Respecting priorities in the Direction of
play to go to score.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
- if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
must always have a support.
ball other side
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 47 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4057 / Direction of play


4064 / Direction of play
4052 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 47 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 47 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4057
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

4 vs 2 keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

20x10 yard field (two 10x10 yards square


side to side). Four players (outside the
squares) try to keep possession of the ball
- choosing in priority the forward solution
against two defenders who try to get it
back.
- if there is no forward solution : playing
Passes have to go through at least one of
laterally
both squares. Each defender has to stay
in his square.
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate The player who loses the ball becomes a
to play with the support. The ball carrier
defender.
must always have a support.
To score, bringing the ball from A to B or
from B to A with or without using C and D.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Variations :
Equipment : balls, cones.

- free play
- players are limited to 2 or 3 touches

Tactical 4064
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 captains game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

35x20 yard field with 2 zones (3 yards) at


the extremities.
4 vs 4 game inside the field. To score, the
team has to pass the ball to the fifth
player (the captain) who is in the opposite
zone. The team scores one point of the
captain have the ball under control inside
the zone.
Changing captains regularly. When a
team scores, the captain restarts the play
for the other team.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

15 min

Instruction :
- choosing the forward solution in priority

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 47 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4052
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 35x20 yards wider than


longer field.
Each team attacks and defends 3 small
goals (2 yards).

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

15 min

To score :
- in the outside goals : dribbling the ball
through
- in the middle goal : free (shooting
allowed)
Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and directing it to the other side

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 48 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1034 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2017 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4052 / Direction of play


4056 / Direction of play
4065 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 48 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1034
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game without pennies:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.
Players do not wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

- small field
Looking around
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins but kick-ins
- looking around

Physical 2017
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Slalom races:

Speed agility

Groups of 5 or 6 players.

Vivacity

Two Variations (see diagram):

Speed

In red: players jog slowly one after one


leaving a 2 or 3 yards space between
them.
At the sonorous signal, the last player (E)
slaloms as fast as possible through
players and goes in front of A.
At the second signal, D does the same;
etc.
In blue: same principle as before but
players jog backward.
At the first sonorous signal, A slaloms
backward as fast as possible through
players and goes behind E; etc.

Coordination
Equipment: none.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 48 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4052
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 35x20 yards wider than


longer field.
Each team attacks and defends 3 small
goals (2 yards).

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

15 min

To score :
- in the outside goals : dribbling the ball
through
- in the middle goal : free (shooting
allowed)
Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and directing it to the other side

Tactical 4056
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

35x20 yard field wider than longer with a 3


yard zone at the extremities.
5 vs 5 game. To score, stopping the ball
in the opposite zone.
Respecting priorities in the Direction of
play to go to score.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
- if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
must always have a support.
ball other side
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 48 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4065
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 gates game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 40x30 yard field.


Four 3 yard gates are set up near each
corner of the field.
To score, the player has to pass to one of
his teammates through one of the 4 gates.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.

15 min

Instructions :
- a team is not allowed to score twice in a
row on the same gate
- if it is stuck on one side, redirecting the
ball to the other side

Looking for the outnumber in the


redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Yearly of 56 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 29 : No printed

Session 2 : No printed

Session 30 : No printed

Session 3 : No printed

Session 31 : No printed

Session 4 : No printed

Session 32 : No printed

Session 5 : No printed

Session 33 : No printed

Session 6 : No printed

Session 34 : No printed

Session 7 : No printed

Session 35 : No printed

Session 8 : No printed

Session 36 : No printed

Session 9 : No printed

Session 37 : No printed

Session 10 : No printed

Session 38 : No printed

Session 11 : No printed

Session 39 : No printed

Session 12 : No printed

Session 40 : No printed

Session 13 : No printed

Session 41 : No printed

Session 14 : No printed

Session 42 : No printed

Session 15 : No printed

Session 43 : No printed

Session 16 : No printed

Session 44 : No printed

Session 17 : No printed

Session 45 : No printed

Session 18 : No printed

Session 46 : No printed

Session 19 : No printed

Session 47 : No printed

Session 20 : No printed

Session 48 : No printed

Session 21 : No printed

Session 49 : Heading technique

Session 22 : No printed

Session 50 : Heading technique

Session 23 : No printed

Session 51 : Heading technique

Session 24 : No printed

Session 52 : Volleying

Session 25 : No printed

Session 53 : Volleying

Session 26 : No printed

Session 54 : 1vs1 defending

Session 27 : No printed

Session 55 : 1vs1 defending

Session 28 : No printed

Session 56 : 1vs1 defending

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 49 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1024 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2008 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3119 / Heading
3118 / Heading
3122 / Heading

10 min
10 min
15 min

Tactical :

4069 / Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 49 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1024
The touch
The touch

Soccer tennis:

Controlling an air ball

2 vs 2 game. Two 6 square yards per


side.
At the beginning, allow 2 bounces then
limiting to one bounce only. The bounce
can be used whenever the players want.
Playing like volleyball: 2 passes maximum
and passing the ball to the other side.
The serve, from behind the back line, is a
pass to the opponent.
Net = barriers, cones, string, etc. or 3
yards space with cones between camps.

Improving the touch


Equipment: balls, cones, net or barriers.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- limiting to 1 or 2 touches
- adapting rules to the level of the players
- playing 1 vs 1, 2 vs 2 or 3 vs 3

Physical 2008
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

running speed

Have teams of 4 players. Each player


takes a place next to a cone. Cones are
placed 7 yards from each other.
The winner is the first team to bring the
ball from the first cone (cone 1) to the last
cone (cone 5) respecting the following
instructions.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3


colors).

10 min

Instructions:
at the sonorous signal, A, who's at the
cone 2, runs to get the ball back at the
cone 1 (carrying the ball) and brings it
back to cone 2.
When A puts the ball at cone 2, B, at cone
3, runs to get the ball and brings it to cone
3;
etc. until D brings the ball at cone 5.
Do several rounds changing position.
Variation:
Same but run backwards.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 49 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3119
Heading
Heading

/3 players headers :

Hitting the ball with head.

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


Triangle : juggling with the head (one
touch pass).
Counting number of headers made
without the ball touching the ground : the
group making the most wins.

Header
Equipment : balls.

10 min

Instructions :
- being on one's toes

Technical 3118
Heading
Heading

10 min

Headers :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing with the Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.
head.
Face to face : A throws the ball to B ; B
passes back to A with the head.
Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on Changing roles.
the form 'prepare and strike'
Variations :
Equipment : balls.
header
jump + header

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 49 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3122
Heading
Heading

15 min

Passing and shoting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing with the Groups of 3 players. A 8x8 yard field with
head.
2 (about 4 yards) goals per group.
A throws the ball to B ; B makes a lead
Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on pass to A with a header ; A tries to score
the form 'prepare and strike'
on C with a header.
Then C throws the ball to B who makes a
Equipment : balls, cones.
lead pass to C with a header ; C tries to
score on A with a header.
Changing roles regularly.

Tactical 4069
Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Spreading out and attacking from the side Game :


Playing the ball wide, using the width of
the field :
- in order to go around the opponent's
defense

55x45 yard field with 2 outside zones (15


yards).
7v7, 8v8 game (or more).
To score, the ball has to, during the
attack, go by both outside zones. If a
team gets the ball back, it has to go by
one side only.

- in order to spread out the opponent's


defense and to create space in front of the
goal
Instructions :
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

- getting wide
- directing the play to one side and
switching field

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 49 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 50 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1027 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2012 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3120 / Heading
3121 / Heading
3124 / Heading

15 min
15 min
15 min

Tactical :

4071 / Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 50 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1027
The touch
The touch

Juggling:

Controlling a air ball

One ball per player.


Juggling following trainer's instructions.
Instructions: right foot, left foot, both,
header, etc.

Improving the touch

15 min

Balance
Variations:
Coordination
Equipment: balls.

- /2 juggling: free, 2 touches, 1 touch


- /3 juggling: free, 2 touches, 1 touch

Physical 2012
Coordination
Coordination

Coordination course:

Speed agility

Starting every 3 seconds, players run


through the course (see diagram)
respecting the following instructions.

Equipment: cones, sticks.

10 min

Course instructions:
A: running through sticks without touching
them
B: 3xs hopping on right foot; 3xs hopping
on left foot
C: running backward
D: stepping on the right and on the left of
the bars (never between them)
E: between bars going forward
F: shuffle between bars going backward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 50 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3120
Heading
Heading

Headers :

Hitting the ball with head.

Jump + 'prepare and strike'

Groups of 3 players. Two balls per group.


Both A and B have a ball.
A throws the ball to B who passes back to
A with a header then turns around ; C
throws the ball to B who passes back to C
with a header and turns around ; etc.
Changing B regularly.

Equipment : balls.

Variations :

Focusing on heading the ball correctly.


'prepare and strike'

15 min

header
jump + header

Technical 3121
Heading
Heading

Headers :

Hitting the ball with head.

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


B is behind C. A throws the ball over C. B
jumps and goes to hit the ball with a
header just over C.
C is a passive defender.
Changing roles after few repetitions.

Focusing on heading the ball correctly.


Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instruction :
- having a good jump to make a good
header (good timing)

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 50 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3124
Heading
Heading

15 min

1 vs 1 heading game :

Hitting the ball with head. Shooting with


the head.

8x6 yard field with 4 yards goals.


Going up/going down game : 1 min. 30
sec. game, the winner goes up, the loser
Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on goes down.
the form 'prepare and strike'
The player throws the ball to his opponent
who tries to score with a header.
Equipment : balls, cones.
One point given to the opponent per bad
throw in purpose.
Going up/going down game rules :
- winners go up (toward field 1) and losers
go down (toward field 4)
- field 1 winner and field 4 loser don't
change field

Tactical 4071
Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Spreading out and attacking from the side Game :


Attacking from the side and looking for the 55x40 yard field with 2 outside zones (10
cross
yards).
7v7, 8v8 game (or more). Each team has
- in order to go around the opponent's
2 offensive supports who are inside of the
defense
outside zones (see diagram). Players
can't defend in the outside zones.
- in order to put pressure in front of the
Scoring allowed only after a cross.
goal
Instructions :
- using spaces freed by the opponents on
the sides
- using offensive support
- supports have 5 secondes to cross once
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
they received the ball in their zone
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 51 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1029 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2003 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3122 / Heading
3123 / Heading
3125 / Heading

15 min
20 min
20 min

Tactical :

4070 / Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

11 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 51 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1029
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2003
Speed
Speed

Sprinting and shooting:

running speed

2 goals face to face (26 yards) with


keepers.
A passes the ball to B and B passes the
ball to A.
After their pass, A and B sprint to receive
the ball from their teammate and shoot at
the goal (First time shot).
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the net first. After the shot, A goes to B
and B goes to A.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- passing in front of oneself and sprinting
diagonally (diagram)
- passing diagonally and sprinting straight
ahead

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 51 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3122
Heading
Heading

15 min

Passing and shoting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing with the Groups of 3 players. A 8x8 yard field with
head.
2 (about 4 yards) goals per group.
A throws the ball to B ; B makes a lead
Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on pass to A with a header ; A tries to score
the form 'prepare and strike'
on C with a header.
Then C throws the ball to B who makes a
Equipment : balls, cones.
lead pass to C with a header ; C tries to
score on A with a header.
Changing roles regularly.

Technical 3123
Heading
Heading

Shooting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Shooting with


the head.

A throws a lead pass to B who attacks the


ball and shoot at the goal with a header.

20 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on Variations :


the form 'prepare and strike'
Variation 1 : ball coming from the right +
Equipment : balls, cones.
header (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the left +
header

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 51 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3125
Heading
Heading

3 vs 3 heading game :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing and


shooting with the head.

15x15 yard field with goals.


Two teams play against each other : 3
players + 1 keeper per team.

20 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on


the form 'prepare and strike'
Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

- passing the ball with the head


- scoring with a header
- when the ball falls, picking up the ball
with the hands and passing it with the
head

Tactical 4070
Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Spreading out and attacking from the side Game :


Playing the ball wide, using the width of
the field :

55x45 yard field with 2 large goals and 4


small goals (2 yards) near the corners of
the field.
- in order to go around the opponent's
7v7, 8v8 game (or more).
defense
To score, shooting in large goals or
dribbling through one of the small goals.
- in order to spread out the opponent's
After a goal on a small goal, the play
defense and to create space in front of the continues but players can not score twice
goal
in a row on the same small goal.
- to look for outnumber

Instructions :

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

- getting wide
- bringing the ball on the sides to play it
quickly in front of the goal
- looking for the cross after a goal on a
small goal

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 52 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1026 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2013 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3126 / Volleying
3127 / Volleying
3129 / Volleying

10 min
20 min
20 min

Tactical :

4072 / Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 52 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1026
The touch
The touch

Juggling relay:

Controlling an air ball

Groups of 3 players with one ball per


group.
Team race relay.
A juggles through the slalom and passes
to B; B juggles through the slalom in the
other way and passes to C; etc.
If the ball falls, the player restarts at the
spot where the ball has fallen.

Improving the touch


Balance
Coordination

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones.


Variations:
- restarting from the beginning if the ball
falls
- going around each cone

Physical 2013
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercise:

Speed agility

First exercise: two lines (lines or bars)


parallel, 20 inches from each other:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step outside the lines, and left foot step
and right foot step inside the lines (see
diagram)
Second exercise: using the outside field
line or bars:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step inside the field, and left foot step and
right foot step outside the field (see
diagram)

Frequence
Equipment: cones or bars.

10 min

Instructions:
- vivacity
- dynamism

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 52 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3126
Volleying
Volleying

Volley passing :

Volley passing
Focusing on the volley form.

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face, A throws the ball to B who
volleys it back to A.

Equipment : balls.

Volleys to make :

10 min

- inside right foot


- inside left foot
- instep tight foot
- instep left foot
Instructions :
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

Technical 3127
Volleying
Volleying

Volleying in front of the goal :

Volley shooting

A passes to B ; B shoots at the goal with a


volley.
Pass from A in the air (throwing or
passing with the foot depending on the
level of the players).

Focusing on the volley form.


Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left +
volley right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right +
volley left foot
Instructions :
- being on one's toes
- keeping the eyes on the ball
- hitting the ball as late as possible before
the bounce

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 52 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3129
Volleying
Volleying

Volleying in front of the goal :

Volley shooting

A passes to B ; B attacks the ball and


volleys it.
Pass from A in the air (throwing or
passing with the foot depending on the
level of the players).

Focusing on the volley form.


Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the right +
volley right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the leftt +
volley left foot
Instructions :
- being on one's toes
- keeping the eyes on the ball
- hitting the ball as late as possible before
the bounce

Tactical 4072
Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Spreading out and attacking from the side Game :


Attacking from the side and looking for the 55x40 yard field with 2 outside zones (10
cross
yards).
7v7, 8v8 game (or more).
- in order to go around the opponent's
Scoring only after a cross coming from
defense
one of the outside zones.
- in order to put pressure in front of the
goal

Instructions :
- playing wide to look for the cross.

- using spaces freed by the opponents on


the sides
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 53 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1025 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2020 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3126 / Volleying
3131 / Volleying
3130 / Volleying

10 min
15 min
20 min

Tactical :

4073 / Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 53 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1025
The touch
The touch

Per 2 juggling and shooting:

Controlling a air ball

Volleying

At mid-field, Groups of 2 players with one


ball per group.
Two players juggle together toward the
goal. About 15 yards away from the goal,
one of the players takes a shot (volleying).

Equipment: balls.

Variations:

Improving the touch

15 min

- free play
- 2 touches (controlling and passing)
- 1 touch

Physical 2020
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Relay race :

Running speed

Making 2 teams. Races.


The player, holding a ball in his hands,
runs through the course as fast as
possible following the instructions then
gives the ball to the next player. This
player does the same. And on and on until
every player has done it.
Doing several rounds.

Speed agility
Equipment : bars, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations :
- shuffle between bars then standing
jumps over each cone + shuffle between
bars then sprint up to the teammate
- same running backward then sprint up to
the teammate

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 53 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3126
Volleying
Volleying

Volley passing :

Volley passing
Focusing on the volley form.

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face, A throws the ball to B who
volleys it back to A.

Equipment : balls.

Volleys to make :

10 min

- inside right foot


- inside left foot
- instep tight foot
- instep left foot
Instructions :
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

Technical 3131
Volleying
Volleying

Acrobatic volleying :

Volley shooting. Bicycle kicks.

B is back to the goal ; A throws the ball to


B ; B makes an acrobatic volley.

15 min

Focusing on the volley form.


Variations (the player choses) :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- bicycle kick
- acrobatic volley
Comments :
- demonstrating if possible
- explaining the good form of the bicycle
kick

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 53 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3130
Volleying
Volleying

Crossing + volleying :

Crossing

A crosses to B ; B attacks the ball and


volleys it in the goal. Then A' crosses to B'
who attaks the ball and volleys it. Etc.

Volley shooting

20 min

Focusing on the volley form. Crossing and Variations :


volley shooting.
Variation 1 : volleying a ball coming from
Equipment : balls, cones.
the right
Variation 2 : volleying a ball coming from
the left
Instructions :
- volleying right and left foot
- A and A' cross with their good foot
- throwing the ball if players can not cross

Tactical 4073
Spreading out and attacking from the side

20 min

Spreading out and attacking from the side Directed game :


Attacking from the side and looking for the 55x40 yard field.
cross
7v7, 8v8 game (or more).
- in order to go around the opponent's
defense
- in order to put pressure in front of the
goal

Instructions :
- free play but goals scored after a cross
gives 3 points ; 1 point for others
- attacking from the sides and looking for
the cross

- using spaces freed by the opponents on


the sides
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 54 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1034 / Small sided games

15 min

Technical :

3145 / Defending techniques


3146 / Defending techniques
3147 / Defending techniques

10 min
10 min
10 min

Tactical :

4091 / 1 vs 1 defending

15 min

Match :

5053 / Defending on a direct opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 20

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 54 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1034
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game without pennies:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.
Players do not wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

- small field
Looking around
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins but kick-ins
- looking around

Technical 3145
Defending techniques
Defending techniques

10 min

Sliding tackle :

Sliding tackle

One ball per player.


The players runs toward the ball and
- getting the planted leg under the tackling makes a sliding tackle to kick the ball out
leg
of bounce.
- tackling the ball at the good moment

Instructions :

- keeping the eyes on the ball

- demonstrating a sliding tackle


- explanation of the form

- sliding and not throwing


Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 54 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3146
Defending techniques
Defending techniques

10 min

Sliding tackle :

Sliding tackle

One ball per player.


Players advance on a 20x20 yard field.
- getting the planted leg under the tackling Players dribble the ball. At the trainer's
leg
signal, they push the ball too far and
tackle it to prevent the ball from going out
- tackling the ball at the good moment
of bounce.
- keeping the eyes on the ball

Instructions :

- sliding and not throwing

- demonstrating a sliding tackle


- explanation of the form
- watching out for other players

Equipment : balls, cones.

Technical 3147
Defending techniques
Defending techniques

10 min

Sliding tackle :

Sliding tackle

Groups of 4 players like on the diagram.


Maximum 6 players per station.
- getting the planted leg under the tackling A kicks the ball toward the side line ; B
leg
runs and makes a sliding tackle to prevent
the ball from going out of bounce.
- tackling the ball at the good moment
Instructions :
- keeping the eyes on the ball
- A must make a good pass toward the
- sliding and not throwing
side line (not to soft not too strong)
- demonstrating a sliding tackle
Equipment : balls.
- explanation of the form

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 54 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4091
1 vs 1 defending
1 vs 1 defending

1 vs 1 defending :

Principles to respect :

15x15 yard field with 2 small goals (2


yards).
A has to dribble the ball through one of
the goals defended by B.
Two teams play against each other. The
defender scores one point when he
prevents the attacker from scoring.
Changing attackers and defenders every
4 minutes.
The team giving up the least number of
goals wins.

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)
- getting the ball back : getting the ball
back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
to the mistake
- defending the goal : being constantly
between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)

15 min

Instructions :
- focusing on the play of the defender
- position and movement of the defender
- doing several rounds

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

Match 5053
Defending on a direct opponent
Defending on a direct opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Principle of defense :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles in 1v1 defending.
Using defensive techniques.

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)

20 min

- getting the ball back : getting the ball


back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
to the mistake
- defending the goal : being constantly
between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 55 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1022 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2001 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3147 / Defending techniques


3148 / Defending techniques
3149 / Defending techniques

10 min
10 min
20 min

Match :

5053 / Defending on a direct opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 55 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1022
The touch
The touch

Juggling test:

Juggling

Balance

2 players: one player juggles and the


other one counts.
3 attempts per player with each juggling
variation (keep the highest score).
Keeping track of the results.

Coordination

Variations:

Equipment: balls.

- Right foot
- Left foot
- Header
- Free

Individual control of the ball

15 min

- etc.

Physical 2001
Speed
Speed

Speed tests:

running speed

Speed: 40 meters timed.


Going back and forth speed: 4x10m
timed.
One attempt on each course.
Keeping track of times to compare them
to previous tests.

Equipment: cones, decameter.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

28 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 55 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3147
Defending techniques
Defending techniques

10 min

Sliding tackle :

Sliding tackle

Groups of 4 players like on the diagram.


Maximum 6 players per station.
- getting the planted leg under the tackling A kicks the ball toward the side line ; B
leg
runs and makes a sliding tackle to prevent
the ball from going out of bounce.
- tackling the ball at the good moment
Instructions :
- keeping the eyes on the ball
- A must make a good pass toward the
- sliding and not throwing
side line (not to soft not too strong)
- demonstrating a sliding tackle
Equipment : balls.
- explanation of the form

Technical 3148
Defending techniques
Defending techniques

10 min

Sliding tackle :

Sliding tackle

Groups of 2 payers. One ball per group.


A dribbles the ball ; B runs next to him
- getting the planted leg under the tackling and waits the good moment to tackle the
leg
ball.
It's now B's turn to dribble the ball and to
- tackling the ball at the good moment
A to go to tackle him ; etc.
- sliding and not throwing

Instructions :

Focusing on the sliding tackle form in


order to take the ball from the opponent ;
tackling to get the ball back.

- no tackle from behind but coming from


the side
- demonstrating a sliding tackle
- explanation of the form

Equipment : balls.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 55 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3149
Defending techniques
Defending techniques

20 min

Sliding tackle + shooting :

Sliding tackle

Players take position on the 18 yard line


(see diagram).
- getting the planted leg under the tackling A dribbles the ball ; B runs toward A and
leg
tackles the ball in order to get the ball
back ; B dribbles few yards and shoots at
- tackling the ball at the good moment
the goal.
Focusing on the sliding tackle form in
order to take the ball from the opponent ;
tackling to get the ball back.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Instructions :
- getting up quickly after the tackle
- finishing
- the ball carrier dribbles straight (passive,
does not try to keep possession of the
ball)

Match 5053
Defending on a direct opponent
Defending on a direct opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Principle of defense :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles in 1v1 defending.
Using defensive techniques.

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)

20 min

- getting the ball back : getting the ball


back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
to the mistake
- defending the goal : being constantly
between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 56 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1015 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2009 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4090 / 1 vs 1 defending
4092 / 1 vs 1 defending
4094 / 2 vs 2 defending

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5053 / Defending on a direct opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

31 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 56 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1015
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Keeping possession of the ball

60x40 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
Two teams play against each other (6v6
or more) depending on the number of
players. Keepers are in the zone opposed
to their camp.
To score, the keeper has to catch an air
pass without releasing it.

Playing forward
Keeper throw
Long air pass

15 min

Equipment: 1 ball, pennies (2 colors).


Instructions:
- free play
- after a goal and when there is a goal
kick, the keeper throws the ball for the
other team
- no corner kick (throw from the keeper to
the opposite team)

Physical 2009
Speed
Speed

Reacting to the opponent come back:

Running speed

Groups of 2 players: B is 30 yards away


face to the goal. A is 7 yards behind him
with ball.
A passes the ball through B's legs and
tries to prevent B from scoring.
When B sees the ball go through his/her
legs they sprint to get it back and try to
score reacting to A's come back.
Be a then B alternatively.

Reaction speed
Gestural speed
Equipment: balls.

10 min

Comment:
All the players work on the same goal to
allow players to totally recover after each
run.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 56 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4090
1 vs 1 defending
1 vs 1 defending

1 vs 1 duel sequences :

Principles to respect :

20x10 yard field split in 5 zones (4 yards).


The attacker tries to dribble the ball up to
zone E. A defender takes place in zone D.
The play starts when the attacker touches
the ball. The defender tries to get the ball
back.
Changing attackers and defenders every
3 minutes.
Doing several rounds.
Getting the ball back as soon as possible
to score a maximum of points :

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)
- getting the ball back : getting the ball
back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
to the mistake

15 min

- defending the goal : being constantly


between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Tactical 4092
1 vs 1 defending
1 vs 1 defending

1 vs 1 duel :

Principles to respect :

Several 15x6 yard fields with a 2 yards


area at the extremities.
1 vs 1 : to score, the player has to stop
the ball in the opposite zone.
1 minute 30 sec. games.
Going up/going down game : the winner
goes up, the loser goes down.

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close to the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)
- getting the ball back : getting the ball
back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
- defending the goal : being constantly
between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)
Equipment : balls, cones.

15 min

Going up/going down game rules :


- winners go up (toward field 1) and losers
go down (toward field 4)
- field 1 winner and field 4 loser don't
change field
Instructions :
- focusing on the play of the defender
- position and move of the defender

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 56 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 defending

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4094
2 vs 2 defending
2 vs 2 defending

2 vs 2 defending :

Principles to respect :

Making teams of 2 players.


Setting up several 20x20 yard fields with
small goals (2 yards).
Changing opponents regularly.
2 vs 2 games with the following
instructions.

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)
- getting the ball back : getting the ball
back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
to the mistake

15 min

Instructions :
- a goal scored after getting back the ball
in one's side gives 3 points
- waiting for the opponent and counter
attacking
- focus on the play of the defender

- defending the goal : being constantly


between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Match 5053
Defending on a direct opponent
Defending on a direct opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Principle of defense :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles in 1v1 defending.
Using defensive techniques.

- stopping the opponent progress :


reducing his space of play (being very
close the opponent to prevent him from
playing forward)

20 min

- getting the ball back : getting the ball


back as close as possible from the
opponent goal ; looking for the
interception (when the player is sure to
get the ball) ; faking to draw the attacker
to the mistake
- defending the goal : being constantly
between the ball and the goal ; directing
the opponent away from the defending
goal ; to not be eliminated (no rushing)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

34 / 34

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Seasonal of 24 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : First touch on ball on the ground

Session 13 : No printed

Session 2 : First touch on ball on the ground

Session 14 : No printed

Session 3 : First touch on ball on the ground

Session 15 : No printed

Session 4 : First touch on air ball

Session 16 : No printed

Session 5 : First touch on air ball

Session 17 : No printed

Session 6 : First touch on air ball

Session 18 : No printed

Session 7 : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Session 19 : No printed

Session 8 : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Session 20 : No printed

Session 9 : No printed

Session 21 : No printed

Session 10 : No printed

Session 22 : No printed

Session 11 : No printed

Session 23 : No printed

Session 12 : No printed

Session 24 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1026 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3002 / 90 degree turn


3006 / 90 degrees control
3005 / 90 degrees control

10 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5004 / Controls

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1026
The touch
The touch

Juggling relay:

Controlling an air ball

Groups of 3 players with one ball per


group.
Team race relay.
A juggles through the slalom and passes
to B; B juggles through the slalom in the
other way and passes to C; etc.
If the ball falls, the player restarts at the
spot where the ball has fallen.

Improving the touch


Balance
Coordination

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones.


Variations:
- restarting from the beginning if the ball
falls
- going around each cone

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3002
90 degree turn
90 degree turn

First touch + passing + moving :

First touch to change direction away from


pressure

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


Triangle, controlling + passing + moving.
The player takes the place of the
teammate he just passed the ball to.
Distance between players : 7-8 yards

First touch + pass


Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.

Coaching points :

First touch options : inside right foot


toward the right ; inside right foot toward
the left ; outside right foot ; etc. Same with
left foot.

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball
- first touch in the direction of the player
we want to pass the ball to

10 min

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3006
90 degrees control
90 degrees control

Give and go :

First touch to change direction and to go


away from the opponent

Groups of 4 players with one ball per


group.
A passes to B ; B passes back to A ; A
passes to C and runs to C ; C passes to
B, etc. (see diagram)
Always controlling the ball before a pass.

Control + pass
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.

15 min

Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 1 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3005
90 degrees control
90 degrees control

20 min

Technical course :

First touch to change direction and to go


away from the opponent

Two goals 25 yards away from each


other. Controlling, passing and shooting
sequences.
Control + pass
A passes to B who controls and passes to
C ; C controls and passes to D ; D
Control + shot
controls and shoots at the goal. After his
pass, the player moves to the next
Focusing on the quality of the first touch,
position :
the passes and the shots.
A goes in B ; B in C ; C in D ; D in A' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on the
Different kind of control to make : inside
number of players to have a minimum of
right foot toward the right ; inside right foot timeout.
toward the left ; outside right foot ; etc.
Same with left foot.
Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones.

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

Match 5004
Controls
Controls

8 vs 8 game :

Passing

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good first touch.
Quality of the sequences first touch +
pass and first touch + shot.

Shooting

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1022 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2001 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3021 / 180 degrees control


3022 / 180 degrees control
3025 / 180 degrees control

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5004 / Controls

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1022
The touch
The touch

Juggling test:

Juggling

Balance

2 players: one player juggles and the


other one counts.
3 attempts per player with each juggling
variation (keep the highest score).
Keeping track of the results.

Coordination

Variations:

Equipment: balls.

- Right foot
- Left foot
- Header
- Free

Individual control of the ball

15 min

- etc.

Physical 2001
Speed
Speed

Speed tests:

running speed

Speed: 40 meters timed.


Going back and forth speed: 4x10m
timed.
One attempt on each course.
Keeping track of times to compare them
to previous tests.

Equipment: cones, decameter.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3021
180 degrees control
180 degrees control

Controlling + passing :

First touch to play forward (protecting the


ball)

A passes to B ; B makes a 180 degrees


control and passes to C ; C makes a 180
degrees control and dribbles going around
the cone then passes to B ; etc.

Control + pass
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.
Different kind of control to make : inside
right foot and dribbling inside right foot ;
outside right foot and dribbling outside
right foot. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions :
- distance between players : 7-8 yards
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- application on each pass to allow
teammate to work on their first touch
correctly
Changing positions of players (A in B, B in
C, C in A, etc.).

Technical 3022
180 degrees control
180 degrees control

Controlling + passing :

First touch to play forward (protecting the


ball)

Groups of 4 players with one ball per


group (see diagram).
B asks for the ball in front of C ; A passes
to B ; B makes a 180 degrees control
protecting his ball and passes to D ; (then
C asks for the ball in front of B ; D passes
to C ; etc.).
One after one, B and C play the role of
passive defender.
Alternating positions of players (D and A
change with B and C).

Control + pass
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
and the passes.
Different kind of control to make : inside
right foot and dribbling inside right foot ;
outside right foot and dribbling outside
right foot. Same with left foot.

15 min

Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- application on each pass to allow
teammate to work on his first touch
correctly

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 2 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3025
180 degrees control
180 degrees control

20 min

Technical course :

First touch to play forward (protecting or


not the ball)

Two goals are placed 25 yards away from


each other. Controlling, passing and
shooting sequences.
Control + pass
A passes to B who controls and passes to
C ; C controls and shoots at the goal ;
Control + shot
after a pass, the player moves to the next
position : A goes to B ; B to C ; C to A' ;
Focusing on the quality of the first touch,
etc.
passes and shots.
At the same time, A' passes to B' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on number
Different kind of control to make : stopping of players to have a minimum of time out.
inside right foot and dribbling inside left
foot ; inside right foot behind planted leg
Instructions :
and dribbling inside right foot ; inside right
foot and dribbling inside right foot ;
- being on one's toes
outside right foot and dribbling outside
- attacking the ball
right foot ; etc. Same with left foot.
- making good passes (accuracy and
good weigh)
Equipment : balls, cones.

Match 5004
Controls
Controls

8 vs 8 game :

Passing

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good first touch.
Quality of the sequences first touch +
pass and first touch + shot.

Shooting

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1035 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2016 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3030 / Controlling in a direction while moving


3028 / Controlling in a direction while moving
3031 / Controlling in a direction while moving

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5004 / Controls

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1035
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age of group)
placed inside the goaline (players can
play behind the goals). Players can score
in both of the goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2016
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercises:

Agility

Bars (or cones) are placed on the field


(about 20 inches between cones or bars).

10 min

Frequency
Race instructions:
Equipment: cones or bars.
- 2 steps (1 right foot and 1 left foot)
between cones
- going forward 2 cones then stepping
back one cone; going forward 2 cones
then stepping back one cone; etc.
Variations:
First exercise: player faces the course
Second exercise: player moves laterally

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3030
Controlling in a direction while moving
Controlling in a direction while moving

15 min

Controlling while running + passing :

Controlling the ball while running

Making 2 lines of players (A and B). 5


yards space between gates. 2 yard gates.
Control + pass
A makes a lead pass to B just before the
first cone ; B controls inside right foot and
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
makes a lead pass to A through the gate ;
and the passes : when controlling, the ball A controls inside left foot and makes a
has to stay in one's feet.
lead pass to B through the next gate ; etc.
After each round, A and B switch sides to
Equipment : balls, cones.
work on right and left foot control.
Instructions :
- controlling the ball with the inside
- making good passes (accuracy and
good weigh)
- 2 yard gates

Technical 3028
Controlling in a direction while moving
Controlling in a direction while moving

15 min

Controlling while running :

Controlling the ball while running

4 players with 2 per station.


A makes a lead pass to B ; B runs to the
Control + pass
ball, controls and dribbles to C (at the
same time, C made a lead pass to D who
Focusing on the quality of the first touch
ran to the ball, controlled and dribbled to
and the passes : when controlling, the ball A).
has to stay in one's feet.
After their passes, A and C go
respectively to B and D. B makes a lead
Equipment : balls, cones.
pass to C and D makes a lead pass to A ;
A and C control, etc.
Instructions :
- inside foot control
- changing direction of the play to use
right and left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 3 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on ball on the ground Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre
Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3031
Controlling in a direction while moving
Controlling in a direction while moving

Controlling while running + shooting :

Controlling the ball while running

A makes a lead pass to B who controls


inside right foot then passes laterally to A
who controls inside left foot and shoots
left foot (see diagram).
Same other side to shoot right foot.

Control + pass
Control + shot

20 min

Focusing on the quality of the first touch


Instruction :
and the passes : when controlling, the ball
has to stay in one's feet.
- quick sequence control + shot
- making good passes (accuracy and
Equipment : balls, cones.
good weigh)

Match 5004
Controls
Controls

8 vs 8 game :

Passing

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good first touch.
Quality of the sequences first touch +
pass and first touch + shot.

Shooting

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1023 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2011 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3037 / Air ball controls


3041 / Air ball controls
3042 / Air ball controls

10 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1023
The touch
The touch

One touch pass and trapping:

Communication

Making 2 groups of players. Each of the


yellows has a ball and makes a circle
(about 15 yards diameter). Reds without
balls are inside the circle.
Reds jog and ask for the ball from yellow
players. They do the technical form as
instructed by the trainer.
Working on both feet. For air balls,
yellows throw the ball with their hands,
changing roles every 2 minutes.

One touch passing


First touch
Pass
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Technical forms:
- one touch pass (ball on the ground)
- one touch pass on air ball (volleying,
heading)
- chest trap and pass with the foot
- etc.

Physical 2011
Speed
Speed

Sprint and shot:

running speed

2 goals are 26 yards away from each


other. Have 2 teams.
A passes the ball through a small goal (2
yards) then sprints to get it back and
shoot in the opposite goal.
B does the same at the other side.
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the goal first. After the shot, A goes
behind blues and B behind reds.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- shooting right foot
- shooting left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3037
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Controlling in a direction :

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.

One ball per player.


The player juggles the ball. After 4
juggling touches, he puts the ball on the
ground using one of the different air ball
controls. Then he juggles again and after
few touches, he controls the ball ; etc.

Having the ball on the ground after the


first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.

10 min

Instruction :
- control + 3 or 4 yards dribbling

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3041
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

20 min

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

The player juggles the ball toward the


goal and controls it just before the cone
Focusing on the first touch, a quick control and shoots.
of the ball in the chosen direction, and on
the control + shot sequence.
Variations :
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.

Variation 1 : control + shot right foot (see


diagram)
Variation 2 : control + shot left foot
Instructions :
- quick sequence control + shot
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls

Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 4 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3042
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

20 min

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

The player juggles parall to the goal line,


controls in the opposite direction and
Focusing on the first touch, a quick control shoots at the goal pivoting.
of the ball in the chosen direction, and on
the control + shot sequence.
Variations :
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Variation 1 : control and shot right foot


(see diagram)
Variation 2 : control and shot left foot
(players start from the other side)
Instructions :
- quick sequence control + shot
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1028 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2013 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3035 / Air ball controls


3038 / Air ball controls
3039 / Air ball controls

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1028
The touch
The touch

Juggling and shooting:

Controlling an air ball

One ball for 3 players. 3 slaloms are set in


front of a goal kept by a goalie (see
diagram).
Dividing players in 2 groups; a group in
front of each slalom.
First players of each line start at the same
time: They juggle through the slalom and
shoot at the goal.
Free juggling.

Improving the touch


Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Variations:
- volleying
- half-volleying
- putting the ball on the ground before
shooting

Physical 2013
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercise:

Speed agility

First exercise: two lines (lines or bars)


parallel, 20 inches from each other:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step outside the lines, and left foot step
and right foot step inside the lines (see
diagram)
Second exercise: using the outside field
line or bars:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step inside the field, and left foot step and
right foot step outside the field (see
diagram)

Frequence
Equipment: cones or bars.

10 min

Instructions:
- vivacity
- dynamism

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3035
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Chest control + pass :

Controlling + passing

Per group of 3 players. One ball per


group.
A throws the ball to B who controls the
ball with the chest toward C and passes to
C ; C throws the ball to A who controls
with the chest toward B and passes to B ;
etc.

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Variation :
- changing direction

Technical 3038
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

A throws the ball to B ; B controls toward


the goal and shoots.

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left and
shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right
and shot left foot
Instructions :
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls
- quick sequence control + shot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 5 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3039
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Controlling in a direction + shooting :

Controlling + shooting

A throws the ball to B ; B, the goal at his


back, controls toward the goal and shoots.

Focusing on the first touch : a quick


control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Having the ball on the ground after the
first touch.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : control toward the goal + shot
right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : control toward the goal + shot
left foot
Instructions :
- 2 touches if possible : one to control the
ball and one to shoot
- quick sequence control + shot
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3046 / Air ball trapping


3047 / Air ball trapping
3040 / Air ball controls

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5046 / Spreading out

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3046
Air ball trapping
Air ball trapping

Long pass + trapping :

Trapping + long passing

Groups of 2 players. 1 ball per group.


Face to face : A makes a long pass to B ;
B traps the ball with the foot, thigh, chest
or head then passes long to A ; etc.

Focusing on controlling air ball : air ball


trap.
Different kind of trapping to make :
trapping instep right foot ; trapping inside
right foot ; trapping with the thigh ;
trapping with the chest ; trapping with the
head. Same traps left foot.

15 min

Instructions :
- long passes with the instep
- adapting distance between A and B
- application when trapping the ball

Equipment : balls.

Technical 3047
Air ball trapping
Air ball trapping

Long pass + trapping + shot :

Trapping + long passing


Trapping + shooting

A makes a long pass to B ; B traps the


ball ; B passes long to A ; A traps the ball
and shoots at the goal.

Long pass and cross

Instructions :

Focusing on controlling air ball : air ball


trap.

- long passes with the instep


- working on different kinds of trapping
- choosing the kind of trapping the most
adapted to the situation
- after having trapped the ball, A dribbles
and shoots quickly

Different kind of trapping to make :


trapping instep right foot ; trapping inside
right foot ; trapping with the thigh ;
trapping with the chest ; trapping with the
head. Same traps left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
Variation 1 : B crosses from the right (see
diagram)
Variation 2 : B crosses from the left

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 6 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : First touch on air ball

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3040
Air ball controls
Air ball controls

Long pass + control + shot :

Controlling + long pass

A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and


crosses to A ; A controls toward the goal
and shoots.

Controlling + shooting
Focusing on the first touch : a quick
control of the ball in the chosen direction.
Different kind of control to make :
half-volley control inside right foot ;
half-volley control outside right foot ;
half-volley control inside right foot behind
planted leg. Same with left foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : B crosses from the right and
A shoots left foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : B crosses from the left and A
shoots right foot
Instructions :
- working on the different kind of air ball
controls
- good long passes (weigh and accuracy)

Match 5046
Spreading out
Spreading out

20 min

8 vs 8 game :

Spreading out, playing the ball wide, using 7 players + 1 keeper per team.
all the width of the field :
Spreading out and attacking from the
side.
- in order to go around the opponent's
Looking for the cross.
defense
- in order to spread out the opponent's
defense and to create space in front of the
goal
- to look for outnumber
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1032 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2002 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3065 / 1 vs 1 moves
3071 / 1 vs 1 moves
3069 / 1 vs 1 moves

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5011 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1032
Small sided games
Small sided games

3 vs 3 game:

- few players

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group) with no keeper.
3 vs 3 game; 3 minutes per game; rotate
opponent.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2002
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball :

Reaction speed

Races per 2 players. 5 yards space


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint,
going around the cones of the slalom: the
first player arriving to the ball shoots.
1 point for the team per shot and one
bonus point per goal scored.
One duel at a time (no relay).

Running speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3065
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Cuts :

Cuts

Maximum 4 players per station. One ball


per player.
The player dribbles the ball and makes
the cut in front of each yellow cone (cone
= opponent).
Setting several courses.

Focusing on the notion of change of


direction.
The cut (the move + the acceleration)
allows the player to change direction
quickly.
Different cuts to make : inside right foot ;
outside right foot ; inside behind planted
leg ; double-touch ; etc. Same left foot.

15 min

Instructions :
- application on each cut
- the cut must a sharp change of direction

Equipment : balls, cones.

Technical 3071
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Cuts course :

Cuts

The player dribbles through the course as


fast as he can (see diagram).
Timing : players have several tries to
break their record.
Free dribbling.

Focusing on the notion of change of


direction.
The cut (the move + the acceleration)
allows the player to change of direction
quickly.
Double-touch : double-touch inside right
foot left foot ; double-touch inside outside
right foot.

15 min

Comment :
No specific instructions. The course is set
so that players have to make a
succession of double-touches to go fast.

Equipment : balls, cones, timer.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 7 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3069
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Course with cuts and shots :

Cuts

Players advance on the course (see


diagram).
A dribbles the ball through the slalom and
shoots at the goal. After the shot he goes
to B. B does the same in the other
direction and goes to A after his shot.
The trainer announces the kind of cut to
make through the cones.
Non-stop course.

Focusing on the notion of change of


direction.
The cut (the move + the acceleration)
allows the player to change of direction
quickly.
Double-touch : double-touch inside right
foot left foot ; double-touch inside outside
right foot.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Cuts to make :
double-touch inside right foot - inside left
foot
double-touch inside right foot - outside
right foot
double-touch inside left foot - inside right
foot
double-touch inside left foot - outside left
foot

Match 5011
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Beating an opponent with "faking" and


"pretending". The ball carrier pretends he
goes in one direction but goes in another
one.

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the defender.
Playing 1 vs 1 in the attacking third
(finishing zone).

20 min

- importance of the positioning, the speed


and angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed ;
Keeping the defender off-guard
- protecting the ball (using shoulders,
body, feet, ...)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1001 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2015 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3077 / 1 vs 1 moves
3080 / 1 vs 1 moves

15 min
20 min

Tactical :

4024 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

15 min

Match :

5011 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1001
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

Dribbling and Passing:

Dribbling the ball

Passing

Split the players into groups of 6 or more.


Players make a circle approximately 12
yards in diameter. Two players have a
ball.
Players who have a ball dribble it for a few
yards, pass to a teammate without a ball,
and then take their place.

Equipment: balls, cones.

Variations:

Looking around
First touch

15 min

- asking players to make a fake before


passing
- 2 touches (control + pass)
- adding a third ball (or more) to
encourage players to look up.

Physical 2015
Coordination
Coordination

Agility and vivacity:

Agility

Have groups of 2 players.


Each player has a pennie placed on the
back (half in the short).
Duel: trying to take opponent's pennie
while keeping one's own pennie. One
point scored each time a player takes the
pinnie.
1 minute games. Changing opponent
regularly.

Vivacity
Fake
Equipment: pennies (1 color).

10 min

Variation:
- no pennie: to score, touching one of the
opponent's feet

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3077
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Fakes:

Fakes

Two teams play against each other like on


the diagram. Duel opposing one player of
each team.
A has the ball in front of his feet. To score,
A has to dribble through to both goals. B
tries to prevent A from scoring.
The play is on as soon as a touches the
ball.

Focusing on the notions of making


believe, pretending.
Pretending to go in a direction and going
in other one.

15 min

Unbalancing one's opponent.


Instruction:
Fakes to make: body fakes; shot fake;
scissors; step-over; double scissors; etc.
Using right and left foot.
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- A multiplies the fakes without touches


the ball to unbalance B and goes to score
a goal in the opposite goal.
Variations:
- the defenders scores if he takes the ball
back from the attacker
- the defender scores if he tags the
attacker

Technical 3080
1 vs 1 moves
1 vs 1 moves

Fake and 1 vs 1 and shot:

Fakes

The attacker tries to score after having


eliminated the defender who's in the 6x6
square yard.

Fake and shot


Focusing on the notions of making
believe, pretending.Keeping the defender
off-guard.
Pretending to go in a direction and going
in other one. Looking for effectiveness in
the shots.
Fakes to make: body fakes; shot fake;
scissors; step-over; double scissors; etc.
Using right and left foot.
Equipment: balls, cones.

20 min

Variations:
- the defender just does opposite without
trying to intercept the ball (passive
defender)
- the defender tries to get the ball back
(active defender)
Instructions:
- using different fakes to go past the
opponent
- trying to score just after having beaten
an opponent

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 8 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4024
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

1 vs 1 duel:

Beating an opponent is associated with


the notions of "faking" and "pretending".
The ball carrier pretends a goes in a
direction but goes in another one.

15x15 square yard field with 2 small goals


(2 yards).
Exercise is set up like on the diagram.
The attacker (yellow) dribbles toward the
defender (red) and tries to go past them to
score on one of two goals.
To score, A has to dribble the ball through
one of both goals defended by B.
Changing roles every 4 minutes. Do
several rounds.

- Appreciating the position, the speed and


angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed;
Keeping the defender off-guard

Instructions:

- protecting the ball (using shoulders,


body, feet,)

- 1 point per goal scored


- using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the opponent

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

Match 5011
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Beating an opponent with "faking" and


"pretending". The ball carrier pretends he
goes in one direction but goes in another
one.

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the defender.
Playing 1 vs 1 in the attacking third
(finishing zone).

20 min

- importance of the positioning, the speed


and angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed ;
Keeping the defender off-guard
- protecting the ball (using shoulders,
body, feet, ...)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Seasonal of 24 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 13 : Creating space

Session 2 : No printed

Session 14 : One touch play

Session 3 : No printed

Session 15 : One touch play

Session 4 : No printed

Session 16 : One touch play

Session 5 : No printed

Session 17 : No printed

Session 6 : No printed

Session 18 : No printed

Session 7 : No printed

Session 19 : No printed

Session 8 : No printed

Session 20 : No printed

Session 9 : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Session 21 : No printed

Session 10 : Creating space

Session 22 : No printed

Session 11 : Creating space

Session 23 : No printed

Session 12 : Creating space

Session 24 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1002 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2018 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4027 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent


4036 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
4040 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5011 / 1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1002
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

Controlling + Passing:

Controlling

All the players are inside an area of 20x25


yards. One ball for 2 players.
Players move and pass the ball to each
other. Groups consist of 2 players.
After a few minutes, set the following rule:
everybody plays together (no more
groups); it's forbidden to pass the ball to
the player who just passed you the ball.

Passing facing the play


Asking for the ball
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- after a pass, get wide and face the play
- ask for a pass to the feet
- look around

Physical 2018
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Miror game :

Speed agility

Setting several fields composed of two


7x7 yard square. 2 players per field.
The 2 players face each other each of
them being in the middle of his square.
A leads the game : A runs and touches a
cone with his hand. B plays the reflection
of A.
Going slowly at the beginning then fast
when the game is well understood.
Changing role every 30 seconds.

Vivacity
Reaction speed
Coordination
Equipment : cones.

10 min

Instructions :
- A must always go to touch a cone
- A and B are always facing each other
Variation :
- B tries to imitate A but when A goes
forward B has to go backward and when
A goes backward B has to go forward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4027
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

1 vs 1 duel:

To beat an opponent is to fake to go in a


direction and then going into a different
direction.
- reading the speed and angle of the run
of the opponent

Several 12x6 yard fields with 2 small


goals (2 yards).
1 vs 1 duel on each field.
1 min. 30 sec. games.
Moving up/Moving down game: the winner
moves up, the loser moves down.

- timing of the 1vs1 move

Moving up/moving down game rules:

- change of speed ; keeping the defender


off-guard/off-balance

- winners move up (toward field 1) and


losers move down (toward field 4)

15 min

- shielding the ball (using shoulders, body,


feet,)
Equipment: balls, cones.

Tactical 4036
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

2 vs 2 games:

To beat an opponent is to fake to go in a


direction and then going into a different
direction.

20x20 yds fields with small goals (2 yards)


(see diagram).
Have teams of 2 players and set up
several fields next to each other.
2 vs 2 games: Each team attacks and
defends 2 goals. To score, dribble the ball
through one of the opposition's goals. 3
minute games.
Moving up/moving down game: the winner
moves up, the loser moves down.

Advices and criteria of success:


- reading the speed and angle of the run
of the opponent
- timing of the 1vs1 move
- change of speed ; keeping the defender
off-guard/off-balance
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Moving up/moving down game rules:


- winners move up (toward field 1) and
losers move down (toward field 3)
Coaching points :
- forward passes are forbidden; only
backward and sideward passes allowed
- encouraging players to beat the direct
opponent in the 1 vs 1 situations (taking
risks)

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 9 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 1vs1 moves + 1vs1

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4040
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

3 vs 3 + Gks:

To beat an opponent is to fake to go in a


direction and then going into a different
direction.

3 teams of 3 players. 26x20 yard field with


goals.
3 vs 3 + Gks. One team is resting.
3 minutes per game.
Small sided game with goals close to
each other. Players are constantly in the
attacking third that means priority to
shooting and beating one's opponent.

- reading the speed and angle of the run


of the opponent
- timing of the 1vs1 move
- change of speed ; keeping the defender
off-guard/off-balance

15 min

Instructions:

- when there is a corner-kick, the keeper


- shielding the ball (using shoulders, body, of the team which has the corner-kick
feet,)
restarts the play with a throw (no
corner-kick)
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3
- when there is a goal-kick, the keeper
colors).
restarts the play with a throw (no
goal-kick)
- after a goal, the keeper restarts the play
with a throw (no kick-off)
- encouraging players to take risks:
shooting and trying to beat one's
opponent, playing 1 vs 1 situations

Match 5011
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent
1 vs 1 moves to beat an opponent

8 vs 8 game :

Beating an opponent with "faking" and


"pretending". The ball carrier pretends he
goes in one direction but goes in another
one.

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Using 1 vs 1 moves to beat the defender.
Playing 1 vs 1 in the attacking third
(finishing zone).

20 min

- importance of the positioning, the speed


and angle of run of the opponent
- not to start the 1 vs 1 move too late
- bringing speed and change of speed ;
Keeping the defender off-guard
- protecting the ball (using shoulders,
body, feet, ...)
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1029 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2004 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4002 / Getting open


4009 / Getting open
4010 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1029
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2004
Speed
Speed

Sprint duel:

reacting to a sonorous signal

Races per 2 players. 6 and 8-yard spaces


between lines 1, 2, and 3.
At the sonorous signal, both players
complete the following course
(determined by 3 lines) as fast as
possible:
sprinting from 1 to 2; running backward
from 2 to 1 then sprinting up to the line 3.
1 point for the team per duel won. A duel
at a time (no relay).

Running speed
Equipment: cones, pennies (2 colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4002
Getting open
Getting open

4 vs 2 keep-away:

Focusing on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group, a


15x15 yard field (with a diagonal) per
group.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against two defenders who try to get it
back.
Each defender has to stay in one's
triangle.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- Have teams of 2 players: both players of


the team that loses the ball become
defenders
- only the player who loses the ball
becomes defender

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- leading players in their moves if
necessary
- helping the ball carrier

Tactical 4009
Getting open
Getting open

5 vs 3 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

20x20 square yard field.


5 players (4 outside and 1 inside the field)
try to keep possession of the ball against
3 defenders (inside the field).
Changing roles regularly.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Variations:
- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder
- the midfielder is limited to 1 touch

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 10 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4010
Getting open
Getting open

6 vs 4 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

20x20 square yard field split in 4 squares.


6 players (4 outside and 2 inside the field)
try to keep possession of the ball against
4 defenders (inside the field).
Each defender has to stay in their square.
Have 5 teams of 2 players. Changing
roles of players every 2 minutes.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Variations:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder


- 1 point per 1-2 made between
midfielders

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1017 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2017 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4015 / Getting open


4016 / Getting open
4013 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1017
Tactical game
Tactical game

Keep-away 4 vs 2:

Passing

12x12 yard field. Four players are outside


of the field and try to keep possession of
the ball. Two defenders are inside the
field and try to intercept the ball.
The player who loses the ball becomes
defender.

Getting open
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- 2 touches maximum

Physical 2017
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Slalom races:

Speed agility

Groups of 5 or 6 players.

Vivacity

Two Variations (see diagram):

Speed

In red: players jog slowly one after one


leaving a 2 or 3 yards space between
them.
At the sonorous signal, the last player (E)
slaloms as fast as possible through
players and goes in front of A.
At the second signal, D does the same;
etc.
In blue: same principle as before but
players jog backward.
At the first sonorous signal, A slaloms
backward as fast as possible through
players and goes behind E; etc.

Coordination
Equipment: none.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4015
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking waves:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Teams of 3 players.
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper). The
Yellow team is waiting in the midfield.
When the play is over: the Blue team
goes to the midfield and waits; the Red
team defends; the Yellow team attacks.
If the defense gets the ball back; it has to
play it in the feet of one of the player of
the waiting team.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- asking the ball carrier to challenge the
defense
- asking other players to spread out to
create space

Tactical 4016
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. 35x20 yard field per


group (see diagram).
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper).
When the play is over: the Red team goes
back to defense (2 players and 1 keeper);
the Blue team attacks (3 players).

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Instruction:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- no counter-attack (if a defender gets the


ball back, he has to pass it back to his
keeper, giving time to the opponent to go
back in defense

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 11 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4013
Getting open
Getting open

Captains game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group,


30x20 yard field (with two 3x3 yard
outside areas) per group.
2 vs 2 game inside the field. To score,
pass the ball to the player (captain) of
one's team who's in the opposite outside
area.
When a team doesn't have the ball, the
captain; staying in his area plays with the
opposite team as a support.
4 vs 2 situation when in possession of the
ball.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

15 min

Instruction:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- changing captains regularly

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1030 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2006 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4006 / Getting open


4014 / Getting open
4019 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1030
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 yard field with 4 small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group). 2 goals on each side. Each team
attacks and defends 2 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2006
Speed
Speed

Elimination race:

Reaction speed

All the players are inside of a 6-yard


diameter circle.
Cones are 10 yards away around the
circle. There are 2 cones more than there
are players.
At the sonorous signal, players run up to a
cone and stop at the cone.
The 2 players who are not at a cone are
eliminated.
Start again taking away 2 more cones,
etc. The players remaining at the end win.
Do several rounds.

Running speed
Equipment: cones.

10 min

Variations:
- players jog in the circle
- players move on all four in the circle
- players crawl in the circle

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4006
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 4 game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Making 3 teams of 4 players. 25x25


square yard field.
4 vs 4 inside the field.
The team that has the ball tries to keep
possession of it with the help of the
outside players who always play with the
team who has the ball.
Changing middle teams every 3 minutes.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- outside players are limited to 2 touches


then 1 touch
- outside players cannot pass to each
other
- only passes between inside players
count as a point

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4014
Getting open
Getting open

Gates game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

35x25 yard field with five 2 yard gates


spread out all over the field.
4 vs 4 game. To score, a player has to
make a pass to a teammate through one
of the 5 gates.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Variations:
- players are not allowed to score twice in
a row on the same gate
- adding or taking off a gate

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 12 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4019
Getting open
Getting open

9 vs 3 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

35x25 yard field. 4 teams of 3 players.


Three teams try to keep possession of the
ball against one team that tries to get it
back. A
The team losing the ball becomes the
defending team.
diagram: Red, Green and Yellow play
together against White.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Instructions:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- looking for safety


- playing the ball where there are less
opponents
- looking for and creating space

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (4


colors).

15 min

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1016 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2012 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4003 / Getting open


4011 / Getting open
4020 / Getting open

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1016
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Getting open

50x30 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
6 vs 6 stop-ball (or more depending on
the number of players). To score, stop the
ball in the zone opposed to one's camp.
Players don't wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

Playing forward
Equipment: 1 ball, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- looking around

Physical 2012
Coordination
Coordination

Coordination course:

Speed agility

Starting every 3 seconds, players run


through the course (see diagram)
respecting the following instructions.

Equipment: cones, sticks.

10 min

Course instructions:
A: running through sticks without touching
them
B: 3xs hopping on right foot; 3xs hopping
on left foot
C: running backward
D: stepping on the right and on the left of
the bars (never between them)
E: between bars going forward
F: shuffle between bars going backward

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4003
Getting open
Getting open

4 vs 2 keep-away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group, a


15x15 yard field per group.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against two defenders who try to get it
back.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- Have teams of 2 players: both players of


the team that loses the ball become
defenders
- only the player who loses the ball
becomes defender

Equipment: balls, cones.

Instructions:

- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

- leading players in their moves if


necessary
- helping the ball carrier

Tactical 4011
Getting open
Getting open

5 vs 3 keeps away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

20x20 square yard field with a 5x5 yard


area in the middle.
5 players (4 outside and 1 inside the
middle area) try to keep possession of the
ball against 3 defenders who try to get it
back (they can not step in the middle
area).
Changing roles regularly.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder


- the midfielder is limited to one touch

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

15 min

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 13 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4020
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 3 directed game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2-3


yards).
3 vs 3 game.
Asking players to constantly help and
offer solutions to the ball carrier.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- stopping the game to explain and
demonstrate if necessary

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1012 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2009 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3091 / One touch play


3092 / One touch play
3109 / One touch play

10 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1012
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

One touch pass:

Pass

Groups of 6 players (see diagram).


A passes the ball to B and runs back to
their line.
B passes to C with one touch and runs
back to their line; etc.
Passes must be precise and measured
out to give rhythm to the game.

One touch play


The touch
Equipment: balls.

15 min

Instructions:
- one touch play
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

Physical 2009
Speed
Speed

Reacting to the opponent come back:

Running speed

Groups of 2 players: B is 30 yards away


face to the goal. A is 7 yards behind him
with ball.
A passes the ball through B's legs and
tries to prevent B from scoring.
When B sees the ball go through his/her
legs they sprint to get it back and try to
score reacting to A's come back.
Be a then B alternatively.

Reaction speed
Gestural speed
Equipment: balls.

10 min

Comment:
All the players work on the same goal to
allow players to totally recover after each
run.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3091
One touch play
One touch play

One touch give-and-go :

One touch pass


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


One touch give-and-go : players are
limited to one touch.
The player passes the ball and runs
behind the last player of the opposite line.

- winning time

Instructions :

- beating the opponent

- keeping the ball on the ground


- using right and left foot

10 min

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

Technical 3092
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 5 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who makes a lead pass to
A ; A passes to C who makes a lead pass
to A ; A passes to D and runs behind D.
D does the same course like A in the
other direction.
Changing position regularly.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- no control (one touch pass)


- being on one's toes when receiving the
ball
- attacking the ball

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Equipment : balls, cones.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 min

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 14 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3109
One touch play
One touch play

One touch shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B ; B makes a lead pass to A


; A passes to C who makes a lead pass to
A ; A shoots at the goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the shots
paying attention at the position of the
body.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- players are limited to one touch
- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot
- changing positions regularly

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1014 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2019 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3100 / One touch play


3101 / One touch play
3112 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1014
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The 1-2:

1-2

Players evolve in a 30x20 yard field. Half


of the players have a ball.
Ball carriers play 1-2 with players without
a ball.
A passes to B and asks for the ball,
sprinting; B makes a lead pass with one
touch.
If, after his pass, A doesn't ask for the
ball, B controls it and becomes a ball
carrier.

Asking for the ball


One touch
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- accurate and well directed passes
- players without ball jog and ask for the
ball
- composure in one touch passes back

Physical 2019
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Running techniques + sprint :

Running techniques

Setting 8 bars 20 inches from each other.


Players run through the course 2 by 2
following the trainer's instructions : each
pass is followed by a 10 yard sprint.

Jumps

10 min

Running speed
Instructions for the different round :
Equipment : bars, cones.
- one step between bars : very quick
- 2 steps (RF + LF) between bars : very
quick
- standing jumps between bars
- standing jumps with high knee changing
foot each step
- lateral run : 2 quick step between bars
- hopping right foot
- hopping left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3100
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A in
one touch ; A passes to C ; C passes to B
who just turned around ; B passes back to
C ; C passes to A ; et.
All passes are made with one touch. B
turns around and let the ball go past him
after each of his pass.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

15 min

- beating the opponent


Instructions :
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch (no


control)
- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes

Technical 3101
One touch play
One touch play

/4 one touch passing exercise :

One touch pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A passes to B who passes back to A with
one touch ; A passes diagonally to C ; C
passes to D who passes back to C ; C
passes diagonally to B ; etc. (see
diagram)
After his pass B runs in A and A in B ;
after his pass D runs in C and C in D.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time

15 min

- beating the opponent


Instructions :
- accelerating the play
Equipment : balls, cones.

- one touch passing (no control)


- quality of passes : weigh and accuracy
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 15 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3112
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing and shooting :

One touch pass

A passes to B who passes back to A ; A


makes a soft in-depth pass to B ; B
passes laterally to C who shoots at the
goal.
Players are limited to one touch.
Changing positions regularly.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

20 min

Variations :
Equipment : balls, cones.
Variation 1 : pass from A to C comes from
the right + shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : pass from A to C comes from
the left + shot left foot

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1008 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2003 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3090 / One touch play


3097 / One touch play
3108 / One touch play

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1008
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

The 1-2:

1-2

4 vs 4: two teams of 4 players play


against each other on a 20x20 square
yard field.
Keeping possession of the ball. Trying to
play 1-2 with their teammates. One point
scored per 1-2 correctly made.

Passing and moving


Asking for the ball

15 min

Asking for a lead pass


Instructions:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

- passing and asking for the ball


- passing and accelerating
- concentration and application in
one-touch passes

Physical 2003
Speed
Speed

Sprinting and shooting:

running speed

2 goals face to face (26 yards) with


keepers.
A passes the ball to B and B passes the
ball to A.
After their pass, A and B sprint to receive
the ball from their teammate and shoot at
the goal (First time shot).
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the net first. After the shot, A goes to B
and B goes to A.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- passing in front of oneself and sprinting
diagonally (diagram)
- passing diagonally and sprinting straight
ahead

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3090
One touch play
One touch play

4 vs 1 keepaway (no control) :

One touch pass

- winning time

Groups of 5 players with one ball per


group. 10x10 yard field.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against one defender.
The player who loses the ball becomes
the defender.
Players are limited to one touch.

- beating the opponent

Instructions :

- accelerating the play

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

15 min

Equipment : balls, cones.

Technical 3097
One touch play
One touch play

5 vs 2 keepaway (no control) :

One touch pass

- accelerating the play

Groups of 7 players with one ball per


group. 10x10 yards squares. 5 players (4
outside + 1 inside the field) try to keep
possession of the ball against 2
defenders.
Each defender has to stay in his square.
A is allowed to play in both squares.
Players are limited to one touch (no
control play).
One point scored each time the midfielder
touches the ball without losing it.

Equipment : balls, cones.

Instructions :

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

15 min

- being on one's toes


- attacking the ball

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 16 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3108
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passes and shots course :

One touch pass

A passes to B then runs in front of the


goal. B passes to A who makes a lead
pass to B. B shoots at the goal.
Same for C and D on the other goal.

First time shot


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.

Instructions :

Equipment : balls.

- players are limited to one touch


- using right foot and left to pass and
shoot

20 min

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Seasonal of 24 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 13 : No printed

Session 2 : No printed

Session 14 : No printed

Session 3 : No printed

Session 15 : No printed

Session 4 : No printed

Session 16 : No printed

Session 5 : No printed

Session 17 : 2vs1 attacking

Session 6 : No printed

Session 18 : 2vs1 attacking

Session 7 : No printed

Session 19 : 2vs1 attacking

Session 8 : No printed

Session 20 : Direction of play

Session 9 : No printed

Session 21 : Direction of play

Session 10 : No printed

Session 22 : Direction of play

Session 11 : No printed

Session 23 : Heading technique

Session 12 : No printed

Session 24 : Volleying

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1015 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2020 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Technical :

3132 / Long passing


3139 / Long passing and crossing
3133 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1015
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Keeping possession of the ball

60x40 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
Two teams play against each other (6v6
or more) depending on the number of
players. Keepers are in the zone opposed
to their camp.
To score, the keeper has to catch an air
pass without releasing it.

Playing forward
Keeper throw
Long air pass

15 min

Equipment: 1 ball, pennies (2 colors).


Instructions:
- free play
- after a goal and when there is a goal
kick, the keeper throws the ball for the
other team
- no corner kick (throw from the keeper to
the opposite team)

Physical 2020
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Relay race :

Running speed

Making 2 teams. Races.


The player, holding a ball in his hands,
runs through the course as fast as
possible following the instructions then
gives the ball to the next player. This
player does the same. And on and on until
every player has done it.
Doing several rounds.

Speed agility
Equipment : bars, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations :
- shuffle between bars then standing
jumps over each cone + shuffle between
bars then sprint up to the teammate
- same running backward then sprint up to
the teammate

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3132
Long passing
Long passing

Long pass :

Straight long pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : A makes a long pass to B ;
B controls the ball then makes a long
pass to A ; etc.

Long pass in the air


Focusing on the form of the long passes
and quality of the controls.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- working on long passes right and left
foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight long pass and high long
pass)
- adapting distance between A and B
- free first touch

Technical 3139
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

15 min

Long passing + one touch passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B who passes
Long pass in the air
back to C in one touch ; C passes to B
who makes a long pass to D ; D passes
One touch volley pass
back to A ; A passes to D ; D makes a
long pass to C ; etc.
Focusing on the quality of the long passes After his long pass, A goes to D ( and D to
and one touch volley passes.
A) ; after his long pass, B goes to C ( and
C to B).
Equipment : balls.
Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- adapting distance between players
depending on age and level

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 17 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3133
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing + crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass

A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and


makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D ; D shoots at the goal
(controlling or not the ball).
After his pass, A goes to C ; after his
pass, B goes to D ; after his pass C goes
to A ; after his shot, D goes to B.

Long pass in the air


Controlling + shooting
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass and on quality of controls and
crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Instructions :
- working on right and left foot
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- good weight and accuracy in passes

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2010 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3137 / Long passing and crossing


3134 / Long passing and crossing
3138 / Long passing and crossing

15 min
15 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2010
Speed
Speed

Reaction speed:

Reaction speed

Groups of 2 players then 3 players.


Two players are 3 yards away from each
other each holding a stick.
At the signal, they release one's stick and
catching teammate's stick before it falls.
Same game with 3 players.

Equipment: sticks.

10 min

Variations:
- at the sonorous signal (Go!)
- Visual signal: at the start of a determined
player and in the way he chose

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3137
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B ; B passes back
to C with one touch ; C makes a long pass
to D ; D passes to A ; etc.
Changing roles regularly.

Long pass in the air


One touch volley pass

15 min

Focusing on the quality of the long passes Instructions :


and one touch volley passes.
- working on right and left foot
Equipment : balls, cones.
- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- adapting distance between A and B and
between C and D

Technical 3134
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Long passing :

Straight long pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


A makes a long pass to B ; B passes back
to C with one touch ; C passes back to B ;
B makes a long pass to A ; A passes back
to C ; etc. C runs from A to B to pass the
ball back.
Changing roles regularly.

Long pass in the air


One touch volley pass
Focusing on the good form of the long
pass and on quality of the one touch
volley pass.
Equipment : balls.

15 min

Instructions :
- long pass with the instep
- alternating long passes with right and left
foot
- adapting distance between A and B

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 18 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3138
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Long passing + one touch passing +


crossing + shooting :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
One touch volley pass

A makes a long pass to B (then A runs in


front of the goal to receive the cross) ;
B passes back to C in one touch ; C
crosses to A ; A shoots at the goal (with or
without control).

Crossing + shooting
Instructions :
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, one touch volley passes and
crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

- working on right and left foot


- working on the different kind of long
passes (straight and air)
- doubling positions depending on number
of players (doubling at least A)
- changing roles regularly.

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1016 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3136 / Long passing and crossing


3140 / Long passing and crossing

20 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1016
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Getting open

50x30 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
6 vs 6 stop-ball (or more depending on
the number of players). To score, stop the
ball in the zone opposed to one's camp.
Players don't wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

Playing forward
Equipment: 1 ball, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- looking around

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3136
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

20 min

Technical course with long passes and


crosses :

Straight long pass


Long pass in the air
Controlling
Crossing + shooting
Focusing on the quality of the long
passes, controls and crosses.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Controlling, long passing, crossing and


shooting sequences. Goals are about 35
yards away from each other.
A makes a long pass to B ; B controls and
makes a long pass to C ; C controls and
crosses to D who shoots at the goal with
or without control.
(At the same time, A' makes a long pass
to B' ; B' controls and makes a long pass
to C' ; C' controls and crosses to D' who
shoots.
After the pass, the player moves to the
next position : A goes to B ; B to C ; D to
A' ; A' to B' ; etc.
Doubling positions depending on number
of players. Non stop course.

Technical 3140
Long passing and crossing
Long passing and crossing

Crossing and finishing :

Crossing

30x20 yard field with 2 outside alleys (3


yards).
4 vs 4 (3 players + 1 keeper) plus 1 player
in each outside alley who always plays
with the team who passes the ball to him.
Players can score after a cross only.

Finishing
Focusing on the quality of crosses and on
finishing.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

20 min

Instructions :
- passing the ball to the outside player as
soon as a team gets the ball back
- looking for the cross quickly
- finishing

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 19 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : 2vs1 attacking

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1019 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2016 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4060 / Direction of play


4064 / Direction of play
4061 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1019
Tactical game
Tactical game

Doors game:

Looking around

40x30 yard field with small doors (2


yards).
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). To score, dribble the
ball through one of the doors.
After a goal, the play is still on but it is
forbidden to score twice in a row on the
same door.

Getting open
Dribbling the ball
Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Physical 2016
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercises:

Agility

Bars (or cones) are placed on the field


(about 20 inches between cones or bars).

10 min

Frequency
Race instructions:
Equipment: cones or bars.
- 2 steps (1 right foot and 1 left foot)
between cones
- going forward 2 cones then stepping
back one cone; going forward 2 cones
then stepping back one cone; etc.
Variations:
First exercise: player faces the course
Second exercise: player moves laterally

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4060
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

4 vs 3 keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

20x10 yard field (two 10x10 yard squares


side to side). Four players (outside the
squares) try to keep possession of the ball
- choosing in priority the forward solution
against three defenders trying to get it
back.
- if there is no forward solution : playing
Passes between players must be made at
laterally
least through one of both squares.
Two of the defenders have to stay in their
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate square and the third defender can defend
to play with the support. The ball carrier
on both squares.
must always have a support.
The player who loses the ball becomes
defender. To score, passing the ball from
Looking for the outnumber in the
A to B (or B to A) with or without the help
redirection of play.
of C and D.
Equipment : balls, cones.

Variations :
- free play
- players are limited to 3 touches

Tactical 4064
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 captains game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

35x20 yard field with 2 zones (3 yards) at


the extremities.
4 vs 4 game inside the field. To score, the
team has to pass the ball to the fifth
player (the captain) who is in the opposite
zone. The team scores one point of the
captain have the ball under control inside
the zone.
Changing captains regularly. When a
team scores, the captain restarts the play
for the other team.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

15 min

Instruction :
- choosing the forward solution in priority

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 20 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4061
Direction of play
Direction of play

15 min

6 vs 4 keepaway :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

20x20 yard field. Make 2 teams of 6


players.
4 vs 4 inside the field + 2 players of each
- choosing in priority the forward solution
team on the sides. (see diagram)
To score, reds have to bring the ball from
- if there is no forward solution : playing
A to B (or B to A) ; yellows from C to D (or
laterally
D to C).
Changing outside players every 3
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate minutes.
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support.
Variations :
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.

- free play
- limitation of the number of touches
depending on level of players

Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2


colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1030 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2011 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4055 / Direction of play


4053 / Direction of play
4052 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1030
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 yard field with 4 small goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group). 2 goals on each side. Each team
attacks and defends 2 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2011
Speed
Speed

Sprint and shot:

running speed

2 goals are 26 yards away from each


other. Have 2 teams.
A passes the ball through a small goal (2
yards) then sprints to get it back and
shoot in the opposite goal.
B does the same at the other side.
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the goal first. After the shot, A goes
behind blues and B behind reds.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- shooting right foot
- shooting left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4055
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

12 yard ray circular field. Three small


goals (2 yards) are set up like on the
diagram.
4 vs 4 game. Each team attacks and
defends the 3 goals.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :

- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate - if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
to play with the support. The ball carrier
ball other side
must always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Tactical 4053
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

4 vs 4 game on a 25x25 yard field with


small goals (2 yards).
Each team attacks and defends 2 goals.
Shooting allowed on both goals.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.

15 min

Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and orientating it other side

Looking for the outnumber in the


redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 21 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4052
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 35x20 yards wider than


longer field.
Each team attacks and defends 3 small
goals (2 yards).

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

15 min

To score :
- in the outside goals : dribbling the ball
through
- in the middle goal : free (shooting
allowed)
Instruction :
- if it is stuck on one side, playing the ball
back and directing it to the other side

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1034 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2013 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4054 / Direction of play


4065 / Direction of play
4056 / Direction of play

15 min
15 min
15 min

Match :

5039 / Direction of play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1034
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game without pennies:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.
Players do not wear pennies. Well
determining teams before the start of the
game.

- small field
Looking around
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins but kick-ins
- looking around

Physical 2013
Coordination
Coordination

Agility exercise:

Speed agility

First exercise: two lines (lines or bars)


parallel, 20 inches from each other:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step outside the lines, and left foot step
and right foot step inside the lines (see
diagram)
Second exercise: using the outside field
line or bars:
Alternating left foot step and right foot
step inside the field, and left foot step and
right foot step outside the field (see
diagram)

Frequence
Equipment: cones or bars.

10 min

Instructions:
- vivacity
- dynamism

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4054
Direction of play
Direction of play

4 vs 4 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

4 vs 4 game on a 35x20 yard field with 2


yard zones at the extremities.
To score, stopping the ball in the opposite
zone.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :

- respecting priorities in the Direction of


- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate play to go to score
to play with support. The ball carrier must
always have a support.
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Tactical 4065
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 gates game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

5 vs 5 game on a 40x30 yard field.


Four 3 yard gates are set up near each
corner of the field.
To score, the player has to pass to one of
his teammates through one of the 4 gates.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, Do not
hesitate to play with the support. The ball
carrier must always have a support.

15 min

Instructions :
- a team is not allowed to score twice in a
row on the same gate
- if it is stuck on one side, redirecting the
ball to the other side

Looking for the outnumber in the


redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 22 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Direction of play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4056
Direction of play
Direction of play

5 vs 5 stop-ball :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the Direction of play :

35x20 yard field wider than longer with a 3


yard zone at the extremities.
5 vs 5 game. To score, stopping the ball
in the opposite zone.
Respecting priorities in the Direction of
play to go to score.

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally

15 min

Instruction :
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
- if it is stuck on one side, reorientating the
must always have a support.
ball other side
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Match 5039
Direction of play
Direction of play

8 vs 8 game :

Support and offensive support. Priorities


in the direction of play :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Respecting principles of play in the
direction of play.

20 min

- choosing in priority the forward solution


- if there is no forward solution : playing
laterally
- if there is still no solution, do not hesitate
to play with the support. The ball carrier
must always have a support
Looking for the outnumber in the
redirection of play.
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1022 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2001 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3122 / Heading
3123 / Heading
3125 / Heading

15 min
20 min
20 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 40

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1022
The touch
The touch

Juggling test:

Juggling

Balance

2 players: one player juggles and the


other one counts.
3 attempts per player with each juggling
variation (keep the highest score).
Keeping track of the results.

Coordination

Variations:

Equipment: balls.

- Right foot
- Left foot
- Header
- Free

Individual control of the ball

15 min

- etc.

Physical 2001
Speed
Speed

Speed tests:

running speed

Speed: 40 meters timed.


Going back and forth speed: 4x10m
timed.
One attempt on each course.
Keeping track of times to compare them
to previous tests.

Equipment: cones, decameter.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3122
Heading
Heading

15 min

Passing and shoting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing with the Groups of 3 players. A 8x8 yard field with
head.
2 (about 4 yards) goals per group.
A throws the ball to B ; B makes a lead
Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on pass to A with a header ; A tries to score
the form 'prepare and strike'
on C with a header.
Then C throws the ball to B who makes a
Equipment : balls, cones.
lead pass to C with a header ; C tries to
score on A with a header.
Changing roles regularly.

Technical 3123
Heading
Heading

Shooting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Shooting with


the head.

A throws a lead pass to B who attacks the


ball and shoot at the goal with a header.

20 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on Variations :


the form 'prepare and strike'
Variation 1 : ball coming from the right +
Equipment : balls, cones.
header (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the left +
header

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 23 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3125
Heading
Heading

3 vs 3 heading game :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing and


shooting with the head.

15x15 yard field with goals.


Two teams play against each other : 3
players + 1 keeper per team.

20 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly, on


the form 'prepare and strike'
Instructions :
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

- passing the ball with the head


- scoring with a header
- when the ball falls, picking up the ball
with the hands and passing it with the
head

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1024 / The touch

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3126 / Volleying
3130 / Volleying
3131 / Volleying

10 min
20 min
15 min

Match :

5025 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 30

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1024
The touch
The touch

Soccer tennis:

Controlling an air ball

2 vs 2 game. Two 6 square yards per


side.
At the beginning, allow 2 bounces then
limiting to one bounce only. The bounce
can be used whenever the players want.
Playing like volleyball: 2 passes maximum
and passing the ball to the other side.
The serve, from behind the back line, is a
pass to the opponent.
Net = barriers, cones, string, etc. or 3
yards space with cones between camps.

Improving the touch


Equipment: balls, cones, net or barriers.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- limiting to 1 or 2 touches
- adapting rules to the level of the players
- playing 1 vs 1, 2 vs 2 or 3 vs 3

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3126
Volleying
Volleying

Volley passing :

Volley passing
Focusing on the volley form.

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face, A throws the ball to B who
volleys it back to A.

Equipment : balls.

Volleys to make :

10 min

- inside right foot


- inside left foot
- instep tight foot
- instep left foot
Instructions :
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball

Technical 3130
Volleying
Volleying

Crossing + volleying :

Crossing

A crosses to B ; B attacks the ball and


volleys it in the goal. Then A' crosses to B'
who attaks the ball and volleys it. Etc.

Volley shooting

20 min

Focusing on the volley form. Crossing and Variations :


volley shooting.
Variation 1 : volleying a ball coming from
Equipment : balls, cones.
the right
Variation 2 : volleying a ball coming from
the left
Instructions :
- volleying right and left foot
- A and A' cross with their good foot
- throwing the ball if players can not cross

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 24 of a program composed of 24 sessions
Theme of the session : Volleying

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3131
Volleying
Volleying

Acrobatic volleying :

Volley shooting. Bicycle kicks.

B is back to the goal ; A throws the ball to


B ; B makes an acrobatic volley.

15 min

Focusing on the volley form.


Variations (the player choses) :
Equipment : balls, cones.
- bicycle kick
- acrobatic volley
Comments :
- demonstrating if possible
- explaining the good form of the bicycle
kick

Match 5025
Crossing and finishing
Crossing and finishing

8 vs 8 game :

Cross

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Long pass

20 min

Volleying
Heading
Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training program

Theme of the program : No theme


Type : Yearly of 56 sessions (2 per week)

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Number of sessions per week : 2

Age category : U15

Session 1 : No printed

Session 29 : Creating space

Session 2 : No printed

Session 30 : Creating space

Session 3 : No printed

Session 31 : One touch play

Session 4 : No printed

Session 32 : One touch play

Session 5 : No printed

Session 33 : No printed

Session 6 : No printed

Session 34 : No printed

Session 7 : No printed

Session 35 : No printed

Session 8 : No printed

Session 36 : No printed

Session 9 : No printed

Session 37 : No printed

Session 10 : No printed

Session 38 : No printed

Session 11 : No printed

Session 39 : No printed

Session 12 : No printed

Session 40 : No printed

Session 13 : No printed

Session 41 : No printed

Session 14 : No printed

Session 42 : No printed

Session 15 : No printed

Session 43 : No printed

Session 16 : No printed

Session 44 : No printed

Session 17 : No printed

Session 45 : No printed

Session 18 : No printed

Session 46 : No printed

Session 19 : No printed

Session 47 : No printed

Session 20 : No printed

Session 48 : No printed

Session 21 : No printed

Session 49 : No printed

Session 22 : No printed

Session 50 : No printed

Session 23 : No printed

Session 51 : No printed

Session 24 : No printed

Session 52 : No printed

Session 25 : Creating space

Session 53 : No printed

Session 26 : Creating space

Session 54 : No printed

Session 27 : Creating space

Session 55 : No printed

Session 28 : Creating space

Session 56 : No printed

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1015 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2003 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4002 / Getting open


4005 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1015
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Keeping possession of the ball

60x40 yard field with areas at the


extremities.
Two teams play against each other (6v6
or more) depending on the number of
players. Keepers are in the zone opposed
to their camp.
To score, the keeper has to catch an air
pass without releasing it.

Playing forward
Keeper throw
Long air pass

15 min

Equipment: 1 ball, pennies (2 colors).


Instructions:
- free play
- after a goal and when there is a goal
kick, the keeper throws the ball for the
other team
- no corner kick (throw from the keeper to
the opposite team)

Physical 2003
Speed
Speed

Sprinting and shooting:

running speed

2 goals face to face (26 yards) with


keepers.
A passes the ball to B and B passes the
ball to A.
After their pass, A and B sprint to receive
the ball from their teammate and shoot at
the goal (First time shot).
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the net first. After the shot, A goes to B
and B goes to A.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- passing in front of oneself and sprinting
diagonally (diagram)
- passing diagonally and sprinting straight
ahead

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4002
Getting open
Getting open

4 vs 2 keep-away:

Focusing on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Groups of 6 players. One ball per group, a


15x15 yard field (with a diagonal) per
group.
Four players try to keep possession of the
ball against two defenders who try to get it
back.
Each defender has to stay in one's
triangle.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- Have teams of 2 players: both players of


the team that loses the ball become
defenders
- only the player who loses the ball
becomes defender

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- leading players in their moves if
necessary
- helping the ball carrier

Tactical 4005
Getting open
Getting open

6 vs 2 keep-away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Making teams of 2 players. 20x20 square


yard field.
2 vs 2 inside the field. The team with the
ball tries to keep possession of it with the
help of 4 outside players who always play
with the team who has the ball.
Changing teams in the middle every 2
minutes.
Counting number of passes: at the end of
the game, the team that made the most
passes consecutively without losing the
ball wins.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

15 min

Variations:
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (4
colors).

- outside players are limited to 2 then 1


touch
- outside players cannot pass to each
other
- only passes between inside players
count as a point

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

4 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 25 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

5 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1033 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2020 / Speed and coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4012 / Getting open


4018 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open


5060 / Free play

20 min
20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

6 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1033
Small sided games
Small sided games

3 vs 3 game:

- few players

30x20 yard field with small goals (2 yards


or bigger depending on the age group)
and a impenetrable box (2x3 yards) in
front of each goal.
To score, the player must be in the
opponents half. Nobody is allowed to step
inside the box in front of the goals.
3 vs 3 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2020
Speed and coordination
Speed and coordination

Relay race :

Running speed

Making 2 teams. Races.


The player, holding a ball in his hands,
runs through the course as fast as
possible following the instructions then
gives the ball to the next player. This
player does the same. And on and on until
every player has done it.
Doing several rounds.

Speed agility
Equipment : bars, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations :
- shuffle between bars then standing
jumps over each cone + shuffle between
bars then sprint up to the teammate
- same running backward then sprint up to
the teammate

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

7 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4012
Getting open
Getting open

Checkers game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

20x15 yard field split in 5x5 square yards.


Two teams of 6 players take place on the
field like on the diagram. Each player has
to stay in their own square delimited per
cones.
The team that has the ball tries to keep it.
1 point for the team that makes 10 passes
consecutively.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- free play
- players have 4 seconds to release the
ball
- no voice communication

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4018
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 2 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

35x25 yard field. 5 teams of 2 players.


Four teams try to keep possession of the
ball against one team that tries to get it
back. A
The team losing the ball becomes the
defending team.
diagram: Red, Blue, Green and Yellow
play together against White.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Instructions:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- looking for safety


- playing the ball where there are less
opponents
- looking for and creating space

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (5


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 min

8 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 26 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

Match 5060
Free play
Free play

8 vs 8 game :

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Free play.
No specific instructions.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 min

9 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1021 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2005 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4015 / Getting open


4016 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1021
Tactical game
Tactical game

Big warm-up game:

Long air pass

An 8x8 yard area is in the middle of a


25x25 square yard field.
5 vs 5 game (or more depending on the
number of players). The keeper is in the
middle area. No other player is allowed to
step in the middle area.
To score, one has to pass the ball in the
air to the keeper who has to catch the ball
without releasing it. The keeper always
plays with the team that has the ball.

Game for keepers


Equipment: 1 ball, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- limiting the number of touches

Physical 2005
Speed
Speed

Race - Relays:

changing speed

Making 2 teams. 5 yards spaces between


lines of cones. At the sonorous signal, the
first player of each team gets the ball
placed on the second line and brings it
back to the first line;
then they run to get the ball placed on the
third line and bring it back to the hands of
the next player.
This player brings the ball back to the
second line then comes back to get the
ball placed on the first line and brings it
back to the third line.
They run back to give the relay to the third
player tagging him in the hand, act.
Alternatively, players bring back or
replace the balls.
The first team to finish wins. Do several
rounds.

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

11 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4015
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking waves:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Teams of 3 players.
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper). The
Yellow team is waiting in the midfield.
When the play is over: the Blue team
goes to the midfield and waits; the Red
team defends; the Yellow team attacks.
If the defense gets the ball back; it has to
play it in the feet of one of the player of
the waiting team.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- asking the ball carrier to challenge the
defense
- asking other players to spread out to
create space

Tactical 4016
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 2 attacking:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Groups of 6 players. 35x20 yard field per


group (see diagram).
The Red team (3 players) attacks the Blue
team (2 players and 1 keeper).
When the play is over: the Red team goes
back to defense (2 players and 1 keeper);
the Blue team attacks (3 players).

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Instruction:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- no counter-attack (if a defender gets the


ball back, he has to pass it back to his
keeper, giving time to the opponent to go
back in defense

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

12 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 27 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

13 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1035 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2015 / Coordination

10 min

Tactical :

4006 / Getting open


4010 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

14 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1035
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age of group)
placed inside the goaline (players can
play behind the goals). Players can score
in both of the goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2015
Coordination
Coordination

Agility and vivacity:

Agility

Have groups of 2 players.


Each player has a pennie placed on the
back (half in the short).
Duel: trying to take opponent's pennie
while keeping one's own pennie. One
point scored each time a player takes the
pinnie.
1 minute games. Changing opponent
regularly.

Vivacity
Fake
Equipment: pennies (1 color).

10 min

Variation:
- no pennie: to score, touching one of the
opponent's feet

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

15 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4006
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 4 game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

Making 3 teams of 4 players. 25x25


square yard field.
4 vs 4 inside the field.
The team that has the ball tries to keep
possession of it with the help of the
outside players who always play with the
team who has the ball.
Changing middle teams every 3 minutes.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Variations:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- outside players are limited to 2 touches


then 1 touch
- outside players cannot pass to each
other
- only passes between inside players
count as a point

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (3


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4010
Getting open
Getting open

6 vs 4 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

20x20 square yard field split in 4 squares.


6 players (4 outside and 2 inside the field)
try to keep possession of the ball against
4 defenders (inside the field).
Each defender has to stay in their square.
Have 5 teams of 2 players. Changing
roles of players every 2 minutes.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

Variations:
- Giving/creating oneself free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- 1 point per pass made to the midfielder


- 1 point per 1-2 made between
midfielders

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

16 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 28 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

17 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1017 / Tactical game

15 min

Physical :

2006 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4019 / Getting open


4014 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

18 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1017
Tactical game
Tactical game

Keep-away 4 vs 2:

Passing

12x12 yard field. Four players are outside


of the field and try to keep possession of
the ball. Two defenders are inside the
field and try to intercept the ball.
The player who loses the ball becomes
defender.

Getting open
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Variations:
- free play
- 2 touches maximum

Physical 2006
Speed
Speed

Elimination race:

Reaction speed

All the players are inside of a 6-yard


diameter circle.
Cones are 10 yards away around the
circle. There are 2 cones more than there
are players.
At the sonorous signal, players run up to a
cone and stop at the cone.
The 2 players who are not at a cone are
eliminated.
Start again taking away 2 more cones,
etc. The players remaining at the end win.
Do several rounds.

Running speed
Equipment: cones.

10 min

Variations:
- players jog in the circle
- players move on all four in the circle
- players crawl in the circle

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

19 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4019
Getting open
Getting open

9 vs 3 keep away:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

- Being at distance of play: neither too far


nor too close to the ball carrier

35x25 yard field. 4 teams of 3 players.


Three teams try to keep possession of the
ball against one team that tries to get it
back. A
The team losing the ball becomes the
defending team.
diagram: Red, Green and Yellow play
together against White.

- Giving/creating oneself free space

Instructions:

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate

- looking for safety


- playing the ball where there are less
opponents
- looking for and creating space

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (4


colors).

15 min

Tactical 4014
Getting open
Getting open

Gates game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

35x25 yard field with five 2 yard gates


spread out all over the field.
4 vs 4 game. To score, a player has to
make a pass to a teammate through one
of the 5 gates.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Variations:
- players are not allowed to score twice in
a row on the same gate
- adding or taking off a gate

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

20 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 29 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

21 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1031 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2011 / Speed

10 min

Tactical :

4021 / Getting open


4020 / Getting open

15 min
15 min

Match :

5032 / Getting open

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 15

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

22 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1031
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

25x25 square yard field with 4 goals (2


yards or bigger depending on the age
group).
Both teams can score on all the goals.
Each team attacks and defends 4 goals.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- substitute throw-ins with corner-kicks

Physical 2011
Speed
Speed

Sprint and shot:

running speed

2 goals are 26 yards away from each


other. Have 2 teams.
A passes the ball through a small goal (2
yards) then sprints to get it back and
shoot in the opposite goal.
B does the same at the other side.
One point for the player whom's ball gets
in the goal first. After the shot, A goes
behind blues and B behind reds.

Gestural speed
Equipment: balls, cones.

10 min

Variations:
- shooting right foot
- shooting left foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

23 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Tactical 4021
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 3 directed stop-ball:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

Teams of 3 players. 20x25 yard fields


wider than longer with areas at 2
extremities.
3 vs 3 game. To score, stop the ball in the
opposite area.
Asking players to constantly help and
offer solutions to the ball carrier.
Changing opponent every 3 minutes if
there are several fields.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier

15 min

- Giving/creating oneself free space


Variations:
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate

- free play
- players are limited to 2 touches

Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2


colors).

Tactical 4020
Getting open
Getting open

3 vs 3 directed game:

Focus on helping the ball carrier:

30x20 yard fields with small goals (2-3


yards).
3 vs 3 game.
Asking players to constantly help and
offer solutions to the ball carrier.

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play: neither too far
nor too close to the ball carrier
- Giving/creating oneself free space

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- stopping the game to explain and
demonstrate if necessary

- Creating space for the ball carrier or


another teammate
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

24 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 30 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : Creating space

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Match 5032
Getting open
Getting open

8 vs 8 game :

Focusing on helping the ball carrier :

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


Trying to get open.

20 min

- Moving to be sure there is no risk of


interception (no opponent between "you"
and the ball carrier)
- Being at distance of play : neither too far
nor too close the ball carrier
- Given/creating free space
- Creating space for the ball carrier or
another teammate
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

25 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1029 / Small sided games

15 min

Physical :

2007 / Speed

10 min

Technical :

3088 / One touch play


3089 / One touch play
3105 / One touch play

10 min
10 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

26 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1029
Small sided games
Small sided games

4 vs 4 game:

- few players

35x20 yard field with goals (2 yards or


bigger depending on the age group) and
no keeper.
4 vs 4 game; 3 minutes per game.
Changing opponent if there are several
fields.

- small field
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

15 min

Instructions:
- free play
- no throw-ins : players must pass in to
play

Physical 2007
Speed
Speed

Duel for the ball:

Vivacity

Have 2 teams of players. 5 yards spaces


between cones.
At the sonorous signal, players sprint
touching each cone of the slalom with
their hand: the first player who arrives
shoots the ball.
1 point given to the team per shot and 1
bonus point per goal scored.

Speed agility
Speed
Equipment: balls, cones, pennies (2
colors).

10 min

Variations:
- start standing up
- start sitting down
- start laying down

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

27 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3088
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : passing using one touch
only. Using right and left foot.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

10 min

Instructions :
- 7-8 yards space between players
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

Technical 3089
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


Triangle : passing the ball to each other
using only one touch (no control).

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

10 min

Instructions :
- 7-8 yards space between players
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

28 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 31 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3105
One touch play
One touch play

One touch shooting :

First time shot

A passes to B ; B attacks the ball and


shoots (First time shot).

Focusing on the quality of the shot paying


attention to the body position.
Equipment : balls, cones.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left +
shot right foot (see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right +
shot left foot
Coaching points :
- attacking the ball
- paying attention to the body position

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

29 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Training session plan

Warm-up :

1013 / Technical exercise

15 min

Physical :

2014 / Coordination

10 min

Technical :

3088 / One touch play


3091 / One touch play
3113 / One touch play

10 min
10 min
20 min

Match :

5018 / One touch play

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 25

Comments :

Legend

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Determine a player
or an area

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

30 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Warm-up 1013
Technical exercise
Technical exercise

One touch, pass back:

Dribbling the ball

Players evolve in a 20x20 square yard


field.
Half of the players have a ball.
Players with a ball dribble and pass to
players without a ball who pass back to
them with one touch to their feet.
Changing roles regularly.

Pass
One touch, pass back
Equipment: balls, cones.

15 min

Instructions:
- accurate and well directed passes
- players without ball jog
- composure in one touch passes back
Variations:
- passing and passing back with the less
stronger foot

Physical 2014
Coordination
Coordination

Running techniques :

Running techniques

Jumps

Two or three lines of players one behind


another.
The trainer runs with the players and
gives the instructions alternating running
techniques.

Lateralization

Running techniques :

Equipment : none.

- high knees ; heel-butt touches


-shuffle (Forward; backward)
-criss-cross (Forward; backward)
- running backward, forward, and
backward, etc.
- hopping on right and left feet (forward;
backward)
-roll-over ; flexion ; extension
- etc.

Agility

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

10 min

31 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3088
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing :

One touch pass

Groups of 2 players. One ball per group.


Face to face : passing using one touch
only. Using right and left foot.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :
- winning time
- beating the opponent

10 min

Instructions :
- 7-8 yards space between players
- being on one's toes
- attacking the ball
- keeping the ball on the ground

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

Technical 3091
One touch play
One touch play

One touch give-and-go :

One touch pass


Focusing on the quality of the passes
(weight + accuracy) and on the
advantages of the 1 touch play :

Groups of 4 players. One ball per group.


One touch give-and-go : players are
limited to one touch.
The player passes the ball and runs
behind the last player of the opposite line.

- winning time

Instructions :

- beating the opponent

- keeping the ball on the ground


- using right and left foot

10 min

- accelerating the play


Equipment : balls.

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

32 / 33

Date : 08/08/2007

Training session
Session 32 of a program composed of 56 sessions
Theme of the session : One touch play

Name of your team : Giffnock Soccer Centre

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U15

Technical 3113
One touch play
One touch play

One touch passing and shooting :

First time shot

A passes to B ; B makes a one touch lead


pass to A ; A goes around the cone and
takes a First time shot at the goal.

Focusing on the quality of the passes


(weight + accuracy) and on the quality of
the shots.
Equipment : balls, cones, sticks.

20 min

Variations :
Variation 1 : ball coming from the left +
shot right foot ( see diagram)
Variation 2 : ball coming from the right +
shot left foot

Match 5018
One touch play
One touch play

8 vs 8 game :

One touch pass

7 players + 1 keeper per team.


One touch play to win time and accelerate
the pace of the play when the situation
asks for it.

First time shot

20 min

Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

33 / 33

Date : 19/03/2007

Training session
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team :

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U18

Training session plan


Technical :

Match :

Legend

3119 / Heading
3121 / Heading
3124 / Heading
3122 / Heading
3125 / Heading

10 min
15 min
15 min
15 min
20 min

5027 / Crossing and finishing

20 min

Effective length of the session :

1 hour 35

Player

Keeper

Coach

Ball

Small goal

Big goal

Yellow cone

Red cone

Determine a player
or an area

Flag

Bar

Running

Dribbling

Pass or shot

First touch

Juggling

Air ball

Cut / Fake /
Pullback

Slide tackle

Step left foot / right


foot

Comments :

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

1/3

Date : 19/03/2007

Training session
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team :

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U18

Technical 3119

Technical 3121
Heading

10 min

Heading

Heading

/3 players headers :

Heading

Headers :

Hitting the ball with head.

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


Triangle : juggling with the head (one
touch pass).
Counting number of headers made
without the ball touching the ground :
the group making the most wins.

Hitting the ball with head.

Groups of 3 players. One ball per group.


B is behind C. A throws the ball over C.
B jumps and goes to hit the ball with a
header just over C.
C is a passive defender.
Changing roles after few repetitions.

Header
Equipment : balls.

Focusing on heading the ball correctly.


Equipment : balls.

Instructions :

Instruction :

- being on one's toes

- having a good jump to make a good


header (good timing)

Technical 3124

Technical 3122
Heading

15 min

Heading

Heading

1 vs 1 heading game :

Heading

Passing and shoting with the head :

Hitting the ball with head. Shooting with


the head.

8x6 yard field with 4 yards goals.


Going up/going down game : 1 min. 30
sec. game, the winner goes up, the
loser goes down.
The player throws the ball to his
opponent who tries to score with a
header.
One point given to the opponent per bad
throw in purpose.

Hitting the ball with head. Passing with


the head.

Groups of 3 players. A 8x8 yard field


with 2 (about 4 yards) goals per group.
A throws the ball to B ; B makes a lead
pass to A with a header ; A tries to
score on C with a header.
Then C throws the ball to B who makes
a lead pass to C with a header ; C tries
to score on A with a header.
Changing roles regularly.

Focusing on heading the ball correctly,


on the form 'prepare and strike'
Equipment : balls, cones.

15 min

Focusing on heading the ball correctly,


on the form 'prepare and strike'
Equipment : balls, cones.

15 min

Going up/going down game rules :


- winners go up (toward field 1) and
losers go down (toward field 4)
- field 1 winner and field 4 loser don't
change field

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

2/3

Date : 19/03/2007

Training session
Theme of the session : Heading technique

Name of your team :

Session plan : Free plan

Age category : U18

Technical 3125

Match 5027
Heading

20 min

Crossing and finishing

Heading

3 vs 3 heading game :

Crossing and finishing

10 vs 10 game :

Hitting the ball with head. Passing and


shooting with the head.

15x15 yard field with goals.


Two teams play against each other : 3
players + 1 keeper per team.

Cross

9 players + 1 keeper per team.


Good crosses.
Looking for effectiveness in front of the
goal when receiving a cross.

Instructions :

Volleying

- passing the ball with the head


- scoring with a header
- when the ball falls, picking up the ball
with the hands and passing it with the
head

Heading

Focusing on heading the ball correctly,


on the form 'prepare and strike'
Equipment : balls, cones, pinnies (2
colors).

Long pass

20 min

Finishing
Equipment : balls, pinnies (2 colors).

http://www.soccer-trainer.com

3/3

Football Movement Syllabus Warm up.

Pre warm up phase(before session)


Rondas squares
(players set up themselves before session)
Into combination Rondas

Speed Exercises
180 degree tag and turns.
Quick passes x 5 or more, feint through legs and
catch!
Hop cross & sprint with a quick stop!

Activation phase switch on. (5 mins)


Hoopla game (handball, 4 v 4 games)

Strength exercises
Pushes and pulls:
Wrist pull over line on one leg.
Shoulder to shoulder, side on to push over line.

Football Movement Syllabus

Agility
Jump challenges:
Left to left, right to right
Opposite foot
Standing broad jump
Triple jump.

Sample of exercises from areas as shown.


Done for 30 mins at start of each session at FFC,
on a theme). (try and make them competitive).

3 plane movements
Jump, knee across and land.
jump and land and twist.
Jump and kick back.
step Lunge and twist.

Dynamic balance exercises


Jump and bounce ball and head to partner
Hop and hold, play ball to partner
Activation phase switch on. (2 mins)
2 v 1 random practice with chaos
Activation phase again

Aims & Objectives Ball work - Technical


(Limited time on this!)
Set up
Ball each. (Gks in as well)
Random practice.

Start
Ball cuts across body
Head up, eyes up in random space

Show and practice 2 moves


Step take
Touch hop take

Progression
Into passive defender early to ensure head up and break into
space across grid.
(Practices Defending steps as well)

Learn
Practice
Experiment
Compete

Set the moves as home practice!

Aims & Objectives 1 v 1 into 2 v 1 / 2 v 2 ( 3 pitches working)

GK

Set-up
1 GK. 1 server. 1 defender. 1 attacker
Start
Server to attacker
Coaching Points
Attacker checks to create space.
Receive turn?
Head and eyes up!
Bounce back if want to.
Open body.
Shift def with sideways movement
1 shift to shoot!
Progression
Work on Both sides receive.
Work on Central pinned up and option to bounce back.

Learn
Practice
Experiment
Compete

Into 2 v 1
Enables attacking decision.
Wall passes, combination play, creativity

Aims & Objectives 4 v 4 game with GKs.

GK

Playing in 1/3rds
Set-up
2 GKS plus 3 v 3
Start
Free play
Progressions
2 players in 1 zone and 1 to support in another zone.
(Encourages depth)
3 touch condition.
(Encourages receiving shape.)

GK

Learn
Practice
Experiment
Compete

Coaching points
Look before receive
Body shape to receive
Touch
Decision

Aims & Objectives 4 v 4 game with no GKs.


Score in corners
Set up
4 v 4 with no GKs
Start
Free play
Progressions
3 touch maximum
3 players cant be in same zone

Coaching points
Look before receive
Body shape to receive
Touch
Decisions from 2 v 1 practice!
Learn
Practice

When to Keep ball?


When to attack?

Experiment
Compete

When to Switch play?

Aims & Objectives

GK

3 v 3 game 1 direction

Set up
3v3 with GK and Server.
Start
Server into Reds to attack.
5 attacks each.
Defenders aim is to get ball to server.
Rotate Attackers and Defenders after 5
attacks.
Coaching points

Now playing marked up.


Create space to receive?

Learn
Practice
Experiment
Compete

Look before receive


Body shape to receive
1st Touch
Bounce back?
Decisions?
When to Keep ball?
When to attack?
When to Switch play?
Counter attack - get ball back to server?

Soccer Drills Low Intensity Aerobic Agility Circuit

Site:Soccer Drills & Football Drills - Professional Soccer Coaching http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com


Title:Low Intensity Aerobic Agility Circuit - Created: 28 January 2010
Low Intensity Aerobic Agility Circuit
Drill Objective(s)soccerfitness and conditioning
1) Develop Aerobic Capacity
2) Develop Agility and Quickness..
*
*
*
*
*

Drill No:Ae2
Age: 12-Adultsoccer warm ups and warm up
No Players:1+
Difficulty: Easy
Area/Time:FullPitch(10mins = 1 set)

Diagram 1

ORGANISATION:
Mark out a full standard soccer pitch as shown in the diagram. Players are staggered around the field at different points to avoid traffic
at any one point of the circuit. This activity can also double as a warm-up.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Players perfom 1 lap of casual low intensity jogging in preparation for the activity. Players then perform 3 laps of the circuit in an anti
clockwise direction. If a limited number of players they can all start from the same point (i.e. top right hand corner of the field, labelled
'start'). Should take players approx 7-8 mins. For the dynamic stretch sections the players perfom the following activities:
Lap 1 =
Fast feet Activity (A) = 2 feet contact through the cones (training bars) in each section (i.e. left and right).
Dynamic Stetch (B) = Walking Lunges
Lap 2 =
Fast feet Activity (A) = Side shuffle (2 feet contact in each section) through the cones (training bars) in each section (i.e. left and right).
Dynamic Stetch (B) = High knees (Also known as knee raises)
Lap 3 =
Fast feet Activity (A) = 1 feet contact through the cones (training bars) in each section.
Dynamic Stetch (B) = Butt Kickers (i.e. heels clip butt on each step)
Break to perfom static stretches.
Perform another 3 laps with the same activities.

Page 1 of 2 - Print date: 8 February 2011

http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com

Soccer Drills Low Intensity Aerobic Agility Circuit

Site:Soccer Drills & Football Drills - Professional Soccer Coaching http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com


Title:Low Intensity Aerobic Agility Circuit - Created: 28 January 2010
SCORING:
None.
KEY COACHING POINTS:
1) Good technique on the dynamic stretches and also the fast feet activities. Monitor both hand/arm and feet movement.
PROGRESSIONS:
1) Reduce the rest period to 2 minutes to increase the intensity of the activity.
2) Increase the target times to longer to make easier.
3) Decrease target times to shorter to make harder.
4) Increase the reps to make harder.
VARIATIONS:
1) Modify the circuit and change the jogging sections into cruise (75% maximal effort) to increase the aerobic nature of this activity.
NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS:
Make sure the players are being pushed. At the same time not overworked.
The soccer graphics have been made with Easy Sports-Graphics (www.sports-graphics.com)

Page 2 of 2 - Print date: 8 February 2011

http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com

Soccer Drills Agility/Plyometric Circuit 1

Site:Soccer Drills & Football Drills - Professional Soccer Coaching http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com


Title:Agility/Plyometric Circuit 1 - Created: 30 May 2010
Agility/Plyometric Circuit 1
Drill Objective(s)
1) Develop agility.
2) Develop explosive speed and quickness.
*
*
*
*
*

Drill No: AG2


Age: 10-Adult
No Players: 1+
Difficulty: Easy
Area/Time: 1/4 Field (15-20mins)

Diagram 1

ORGANISATION:
Arrange the cones/ladders and hurdles as shown above.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Players start in the top left corner of the circuit. The players then perform the 4 activites jogging or walking inbetween each activity.
Perfom 3 circuits and then rest for 2-3 mins. Perform 4 sets.
*
*
*
*

2 footed forward jumps through the first ladder.


Hops (Left footed on the first circuit/right on the second)
2 footed lateral hops. (i.e. sideways jumps followed by forward jumps)
Turn and jumps backwards through the ladder

SCORING:
*
None.
KEY COACHING POINTS:
1) Focus on good jumping technique and mechanics.
2) Reactions when using the variations below.
3) Balance and low centre of gravity.
4) Quickness of feet in the ladders.

Page 1 of 2 - Print date: 8 February 2011

http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com

Soccer Drills Agility/Plyometric Circuit 1

Site:Soccer Drills & Football Drills - Professional Soccer Coaching http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com


Title:Agility/Plyometric Circuit 1 - Created: 30 May 2010
PROGRESSIONS:
1) Vary the activities:
*
*
*
*

2 footed jumps forward, one back sequence in the ladder.


lateral jumps in the ladders.
Hopscotch through the ladders.
Single leg hops over hurdles.

VARIATIONS:
1) Have players positioned by each activity as feeders with balls in their hands. These players can feed a ball to the players going
through the circuits at random points. i.e. player steps out of the activity when the ball is feed and volleys/heads/chest the ball
back to feeder and then continues round the circuit.
2) Have players positioned by each activity as feeders with balls in their hands. These players can feed a ball to the players going
through the circuit on the coachs command.
NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS:
Above all observe technique. Bad technique can cause injuries. Players should not be out of breathe during these agility and
plyometric activities.
The soccer graphics have been made with Easy Sports-Graphics (www.sports-graphics.com)

Page 2 of 2 - Print date: 8 February 2011

http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com

Soccer Drills Reaction and Agility Catch

Site:Soccer Drills & Football Drills - Professional Soccer Coaching http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com


Title:Reaction and Agility Catch - Created: 14 December 2008
Reaction and Agility Catch
Drill Objective(s)
1) Develop a players anaerobic capacity.
2) Develop a players agility.
3) Develop explosive reactions.
*
*
*
*
*

Drill No:AG1
Age: 10-Adult
No Players:5+
Difficulty: Medium
Area/Time:30x20yrds(15mins)

Diagram 1

ORGANISATION:
Mark out a pitch of 30x15yrds, 2 gate goals areplaced 30yrds apart, this distance can be increased to create a more anaerobic work
out. Players line up and exercise one at a time.
INSTRUCTIONS:
A server (Coach) is infront of a group of players approximately 15yrds away. 5-6 players is needed to give adequate rest in between
bouts.
1)
2)
3)
4)

The server passes to A1.


A1 returns the pass to the server.
The server then plays the ball at pace through either gateway.
A1 sprints and attempts to prevent the ball from going through the gate goal.

SCORING:
Teams score by blocking the balls from the gates.
KEY COACHING POINTS:
1) Encourage players to be on their toes and bouncing ready to react.
2) Good firm passing technique.
3) Slide to block shots on the gate goals.
4) Mental Alertness.

Page 1 of 2 - Print date: 8 February 2011

http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com

Soccer Drills Reaction and Agility Catch

Site:Soccer Drills & Football Drills - Professional Soccer Coaching http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com


Title:Reaction and Agility Catch - Created: 14 December 2008
PROGRESSIONS:
1) 2 players can enter to defend.
2) Server can fake to play one way and then shoot at the opposite gate.
VARIATIONS:
1) None.

NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS:


Encourage players to be on their toes and ready to react at all times.
The soccer graphics have been made with Easy Sports-Graphics (www.sports-graphics.com)

Page 2 of 2 - Print date: 8 February 2011

http://www.professionalsoccercoaching.com

Anda mungkin juga menyukai